Home
        2.3.0 User Manual - JShop E
         Contents
1.      Ban Sign Ups From These Domains        Seperate multiple domains with commas   Ono    ves    Convert Line Breaks To  lt br  gt  on News Items  wno O ves    Sending  Emails Per Batch Kb            no O yes       Active Double Opt In Signup       Email Addresses To List Per Page             Sending  Automatically Process Next Batch          Update Newsletter Options         Newsletter Options    Reply   From Email Address For Newsletters  This option sets the email address that the recipient will see on the newsletter  If they reply to the newsletter  this will also be the address their reply arrives to     Newsletter Test Recipient    This is the recipient email address that you would like to use when clicking the    Test    button on the List of  Newsletter  The email address specified here will receive the test mailing of the newsletter     Ban Sign Ups From These Domains    You can enter a comma separated list of domain here that you do not want to allow sign ups from  Often  spam bots use fake addresses at your own domain name when filling in forms  so you should enter your own  domain name here  e g     whorl co uk jshop co uk       Activate Double Opt In Signup    137    Newsletter   Newsletter Options 138    When activated new signups to the newsletter will be sent an email with an activation link in it to double  confirm that they signed up to the newsletter  Without clicking this link their account will not become active in  the system and they will not receive t
2.      is obtained by pressing Ctrl Alt 4 on a United Kingdom  keyboard  This does not always show correctly in emails  we have found  For instance  one copy of Outlook    may display it correctly where as another version on another machine may display it as   instead        Visible   You can opt to make a currency invisible  meaning that it will not appear in the actual shop  This is useful if you  want to add a currency to your store but need to setup prices before you actually make the currency available   It also allows you temporarily suspend taking orders in a currency     Can Checkout In Currency    If you want to show a currency in your store simply for information purposes this option allows you to do this   If the customer is browsing your store in a currency with this option set to YES  they will be automatically  changed to the base currency when they come to checkout     Use Exchange Rate and Exchange Rate    These options allow you to set a currency to be calculated automatically via  an exchange rate rather than  having prices individually entered  All exchange rates are worked out from the base currency so  for instance   if you had a base currency of GBP and wanted to show EUR based on an exchange rate you could enter and  exchange rate figure of 1 4  depending on what exchange rates are at the time   This would calculate EUR to  be 1 4 x GBP     NOTE  It is important that once your store is up and running and you have orders in different currencies  that you d
3.     114    2 Payment Confirmed from Payment Gateway Merchant Aga  3 Payment Failed from Payment Gateway Merchant Y  4 Order Confirmation Customer Y  S Dispatch Confirmation Customer Aga  12 Email Gift Certificate Special   Aga    21 Status Change   Part Dispatched Customer N        This screen provides a descriptive list of all the emails that JShop Server can send out along with edit buttons  for each one  By default  these emails already have applicable content in them when you install JShop Server    but you can  of course  alter these as much as you like  In addition the system allows you to setup multiple  email templates for the same action  for instance you should send order status change emails in different    formats to different recipients  one to the customer  one to a central processing email address  another to an    email address that goes through to a mobile phone etc     When you click the    Edit    button against an email template you will be presented with an editing screen where  you can change both the subject and the content of the email  Clicking update on this screen will take you back    to the email templates list     114    Templates   Email Templates 115    Subject New Order Placed    Content  lt  php   Text Version  echo  hello    a gt   Order Number   order ordernumber   Date   order orderdate   Time   order ordertime      lt  loop order products  gt    order products qty  x  order  products code       lt  if order products extrafields type eq  S
4.     From    address  This means that if a  customer replies to one of the automatically generated JShop Server emails  they will be replying to this From  address  This can be over ridden by individual email template options     Send Payment Success  Failure Emails    This allows you to set whether or not you want the system to send out payment success and failure emails to  the merchant  With this set to YES  not only will the merchant receive an email when an order is initially placed  but  in the case of payment gateways that require the customer to visit the actual payment gateway  the  merchant will receive an email confirming that the order has been paid or that the order payment has failed   depending on what happens at the payment gateway  Please see the    Checkout    and    Orders    section for more  information on this     Email Method    112    Templates   Email Options 113    In JShop Server you can select to either use PHP   s built in mail   function or  if you have access to a third party  SMTP server  especially useful if you wish to use the newsletter feature in JShop Server  then you can select  SMTP Server from this box  Depending what is selected here the following options will be available     Add     f    Option For Return Headers  PHP mail   On    Some servers require that the mailing     f    option is used to send the from address  If you are having difficultly  sending emails from JShop Server try turning this option on     gareth  whorl co uk  gar
5.     Product Options  Product General    Category  Show In Selected Sections   Section Whorl Web Art Store    Remove    New Product   no O ves  Top Product Gw O ves    On Special Offer   no Oys  Is Product Visible    Ono    YES If invisible still allow product to be shown with direct link     no    yes       Available To   Customer Types   Product Flags Preview Only Product     yo    yes  Available In Stores     yo    yes  Red    no Ows  Black    wno Ows       Product Options Block    These are some general categorisation options for the product and this is where you set which sections the  product should appear in and what customers can view the product etc  The fields here are as follows     Product Category  Allows you to select which internal product category the product belongs to     Show In Section    The top select box here provides a list of all the sections  and their full paths   You can select sections from  this list and click    Add    to add them to the bottom box which contains the list of sections that this product is to  be shown on  Selecting a section from the bottom box and clicking    Remove    will remove this product from that  section  In addition you can click the  Set Default    button whilst one of the selected sections is highlighted  This  will make it the default section for the product  and will be used when generating links from other lists on your  store  e g  random products  and on the sitemap  This will also be used when the system creates 
6.    General    section of the documentation for  more information on setting up extra product fields                                                 Red  aM  725446  4 0896 73 7366  8 6516   zc le an  Outlandish      9   Y  option visible  Account Types    Al v  Percent  bocae SS EE  esp 0 0000   usolo o000    eurio o000 cam     Add f clear    Exclude v     Extra Fields Block  Here there is a SELECT field and a TEXT field being edited    Extra product fields of type TEXT will be shown as a single text line field    Extra product fields of type TEXTAREA will be shown as a multiple text line field into with HTML can also be  added    Extra product fields of type IMAGE will be shown in the same way as the normal Thumbnail and Image  fields  Images are stored in products extras however    Extra product fields of type USERINPUT will show a select box with 3 options in it  Exclude  if you don   t wish  to include the field for the product   Include  if you want to include the field for the product but not make it  compulsory  and Required  if you want to include the field for the product and make it compulsory      All other fields  the SELECTBOX  RADIOBUTTONS and CHECKBOXES fields will be shown in a different way that  provides a lot of functionality whilst remaining simple to use     Each option in these fields can not only have a name  and alternative language versions if you are running your  JShop Server store with multiple languages  but it can also be set to only be visible t
7.    Other     In here are any other CSS attributes for the selector that are not covered by JShop Server   s CSS  Editor     What you ll notice when you click on a selector on the left is that not all the sections on the right will display      the editor will only expand those sections that have settings for the chosen selector  However  you can easily  expand other sections  if you   d like to add attributes for them to the chosen selector  by clicking on the  section   s title  eg  click on Colours to expand or collapse the Colours selection     When you make a change to a selector you ll see a Save Changes button appear next to the Close button at  the bottom of the window  Clicking this will update your CSS file whilst keeping the editor open  By doing this  you can have the editor open in a window and have your site open in another browser window  allowing you to  refresh that to see how the changes you have made work in practise     8 7 Advanced Template Defaults    Advanced Template Defaults provides you with a way to select additional default template sets that should be  selected for different browsers  You could use this to select a different template set for visitors using Internet  Explorer 6  for instance  or for those visiting from mobile platforms  The listing page shows a complete listing  of all the defaults you currently have setup  It shows the browsers selected  any custom detection strings you  have added and the template set that should be selected along
8.    Resize Images At Upload   If you have GD enabled on your PHP installation you can use this option to have images uploaded for this field  automatically resized to the dimensions entered in the option above  This means that the version that   s stored  on the server will be the correct dimensions already  In addition you can get a quality setting that will be used  if the uploaded image is a JPG file     34    General Settings   Extra Article elds 35    4 10 Extra Article Fields    In much the same way as for products  JShop Server allows you to setup extra information fields against  articles  You can also change their display order by using the    Sort  Reorder Extra Fields    button     test test IMAGE    extratext Extra Text TEXT  Total Extra Fields     Sort   Reorder Extra Fields    List of extra article fields       What Extra Field Types Are Available     There is a selection of different extra field type available and they are as follows     Note  Once an extra field has been setup you cannot change its type     4 10 1 Adding Editing Extra Fields    Adding and editing extra fields both use the same screen  However  when adding an extra field you need to  make sure that you select the correct type as this cannot be changed later on  You choose the type of an extra  field by using the select box by the    Add New Field    button        TEXT    extratext  Extra Text          Language  Outlandish          Update Field    Editing an extra article field    Information tha
9.    part of the documentation     83    Contents   ABC Products Listing    Total selected products  150  Viewing 31   40    xT  gt   Action    Dozing Cat   Furry Mole   Angel Fish   Picasso Trigger Fish  Basking Shark  Shoal Of Jellyfish     lt  lt  lt   lt    lt    lt    lt    lt    lt    lt     A typical product listing screen     5 10 Invisible Products Listing    This is displayed in the same format as the ABC Products Listing but this one only shows those products that  currently have their Visible field set to NO     5 11 Sort Special Offers    This brings up the reordering screen for products you have marked as Special Offer  see    Adding   Editing  Products      You can move products up down to the top to the bottom  changing their display order  Special  Offers are shown in the default templates on the right hand navigation menu for the store  but you can  obviously show them anywhere you like     Cold Morning   Filtered Fireworks UPDATE  Globe From Space  Leopard In    Waiting   Pink And Blue Nebulea  The Tribe    Update Order    A typical sort   reorder screen          84    84    Contents   Sort New Products 85    5 12 Sort New Products    This brings up the reordering screen for products you have marked as New  see    Adding   Editing Products       You can move products and down  changing their display order  New Products are shown in the default  templates on the right hand navigation menu for the store  but you can obviously show them anywhere you  like     5 
10.   Adding and editing supplier fields uses the same screen  However  some of the options are only available for  certain types of fields  Options available are as follows     Type TEXT  Name sup_company    Title Company Name  Se  Maximum Length    validation   no O yes    validate For Not Blank   Oe          Language  Spanish  Te SS  Vaidation Messege  id    Language  Outlandish  Te SES  Iageieeg  SSS E   Update Field       Editing an existing TEXT type field    Name    This is an internal name that is used in the database  It must be unique and you will be told if it is not  This  field is not generally shown to the customer     Title  This is the description of the field that is shown to the customer in the default templates     Size and Maximum Length  only for TEXT type fields     Size is the actual size of the form field on the page and maximum length is the maximum number of  characters a customer can enter into the field     Columns and Rows  only for TEXTAREA type fields     This is the number of columns and rows that the field should be sized to on the contact form page     Validation  Validate For and Validation Message    If you want to make it a requirement that a field is filled in you should select YES for the Validation radio  button  In addition  with the Validate For option  you can select how you want the field validated  There are a  number of built in validation types  such as Not Blank or Email Address and  in addition  choosing    Custom  Regex     allows
11.   Apply 3D Secure    This allows you to fine tune how you want 3D Secure checking to be applied to orders  For more information  please refer to Sage Pay   s own integration documentation     Authorisation Mode    Protx provide    Full Authorisation    where payment is taken straight away and    Deferred    where payment is only  taken after it is released by you in Sage Pay   s administration system     Vendor Email    The email address you would like Sage Pay to send the merchant confirmation email to  this is separate to any  email sent from JShop Server      Send Customer Email From Sage Pay    If this is set to NO  JShop Server will not forward the customer   s email address to Sage Pay and Sage Pay will  not send the customer an email confirming the order     What Do I Need To Setup At Sage Pay     Nothing needs setting up in your Sage Pay administration system     223    Payment Gateways   Gateways 224    17 4 24 2 Sage Pay VSP Direct  Server Requirements    You will require your own secure server certificate  SSL  and CURL installed for PHP with secure sockets  support     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken     Credit card details are taken on your site  In addition  for 3D Secure transactions  an IFRAME will be shown  within your site for the customer to enter their authentication password     Settings Page Details    Vendor ID    This is the account number issued to you by Sage Pay when you signed up for an account with them  If you  just wish to test you can use t
12.   Do               Update Settings    Gift Certificate Settings    Gift Certificates that are sold in a multi currency store are currency specific  This means that the currency that  the gift certificate is sold in has to be used by the redeemer in order to redeem the certificate  This is due to  problems relating the value of a certificate in a currency that you have setup not using an exchange rate to the  actual base currency of the store     This screen allows you to set some of the general gift certificates options  Options available are     Enable Gift Certificates    If this is set to NO  gift certificates will not be available for purchase or redemption in your store  Note  It is  possible to bypass this option for purchasing of gift certificates but the standard templates do include a check      if this option is set to NO the templates will not show the gift certificate purchase option or the redemption  option on the front end     Expiry In Days    gt   This sets up the default length of time a gift certificate is valid for  with 0 meaning that the gift certificate  should never expire  It is important that you check on the laws in the country in which you operate as to  whether you can set gift certificates to expire at all or have to provide a minimum length of time  For instance   in some US states it is illegal to sell gift certificates that expire and this is becoming more and more common     163    Checkout   Gift Certificate Fields 164    12 6 Gift Certifica
13.   Editing an existing shipping type    Name    This is the name that will be shown on your store   s checkout and should be easy for the customer to  understand     Hat Rate   Multiplication 00  This decides how a rate should be used to calculate the shipping cost  For instance  if you choose    Flat Rate     then the prices you enter in the shipping rates will be the actual shipping cost  If  however  you choose     Multiplication     then the applicable shipping rate will be multiplied by the    Value to Use    amount  For instance  if  you were using Quantity as the    Value to Use    field then a rate would by multiplied by the quantity to get the  shipping cost     Value To Use    Each shipping type can be based on a different value from the shopping cart  The options are Quantity  the  total number of items in the cart   Goods Total  the total price of the goods  excluding any tax  and Weight  the  total weight of all the items in the cart   The value is used to create different rate entries that can cover  different possibilities for this value  For instance using Quantity  you could setup one rate that was only used if  the quantity was less than 10  and another rate if the quantity was over 10  The    Round Up Values    option  if  set to YES  will round the value used to calculate the shipping to the next whole number  e g  a value of 101 45  would be rounded to 102     Base Price    In addition to the shipping cost calculated from the rates each shipping type can h
14.   Send    and  once clicked  will start the send process  If the newsletter has been  sent this button will say    Reset    and will be reset the status of the newsletter to NOT SENT allowing it to be  sent again     Once you click the    Send    button you will be asked to confirm that you wish to send the newsletter  Clicking OK  will load a pop up window with the send page and the first batch will be processed  You will need to keep this  window open for the duration of the sending process  After each batch the screen will update and  depending  on your newsletter options  will either automatically proceed to process the next batch or wait for user input  before sending the next batch     By re loading the List Of Newsletters page you can keep track of the current status of the newsletter  If the    system is still sending the newsletter out to recipients it will appear as BEING SENT  If the system has finished  sending the newsletter it will appear as SENT     139    Newsletter   Adding  Editing Newsletters 140    10 3 Adding  Editing Newsletters    The adding and editing screens use the same page and below are details of the fields available     Recipient List    Full Maing List v  Subject  Content i    e          This is a test newsletter   hope you like it        To remove yourself click here   removelink        E    M A A D A DA o Hp 2  a A   Paragraph   Ford Name   Sze 7B i U B    WW  WW  D  OI  Di  ab   iul     lt BODY gt   lt BR gt   You can add a remove link into 
15.   The User Options Screen    Show Left Hand Menu Section    If you d prefer to just use the top menu options  for instance if you wished to maximise the screen space  available for the main content area  select NO here to hide the left menu section     Search Panel Expanded At Login  Here you can specify whether you want the search panel  at the bottom of the screen  shown open when you  login or closed  preserving screen space     Default Page At Login  This allows you to select which screen in JShop Server should show be default when you login to the system  If  you generally process orders  you ll want to make the Orders screen your default page     Main Menu Mouse Button Configuration  The top menu buttons  by default  load the administration section with a left click and show the sub menu  drop down with a right click  However  you can use this setting to swap these mouse buttons around     Action Menu Position On Orders List    On the orders page each order has an    Action    drop down available to process the order in a number of  different ways  By default this will show in the far right column of the orders screen although using this option  you can alter this to show on the far left     Action Menu Activate    In addition to changing the menu position on the orders list you can change whether the options show when  you put the mouse over the Action button or when you click on it  Again  you can change this option to suit     Note  Many of these options will not tak
16.   The file you wish to use can be supplied  using the    Browse    button on this screen  Once selected click    Remove Emails    to process the list     10 7 Latest News  Title  Date Posted By Action    new news 26 Aug 2005 administrator BA EES  test new news 27 Oct 2003 administrator Eg Delete            New Photographers Now Included 16 Apr 2003 Eq Delete  New Range Of Products  16 Apr 2003 Eq  4    Sort   Reorder News    Total News        List Of News Items    Along with each news item listed there is an    Edit    button and a    Delete    button  In addition there is a    Sort      141    Newsletter   Latest News 142    Reorder News    button that allows you to change the display order of news items  By default news items are  displayed in date order     Note  Please see section 20 of the documentation for more information on how to display news items in    your store        10 8 Adding Editing News Items    The adding and editing screens use the same page and below are details of the fields available        New Range Of Products        UR he    A IA ee MI SS o     vy o    si A Paragraph   Ford Name    Size   B H ZZ 3 RE E  3    Our store now features a brand new range of products  sourced from the pool  photographers who s work in used in internationally renowned magazines         lt BODY gt   Editing a news item    Title  This is the title of the news items    Content   This is the full detail for the news items  This field can contain as much information as you requi
17.   This is your Paypal Express API password  please note that this is not your normal Paypal password     Signature  This is the API signature provided by Paypal s own administration system for API calls     Payment Type   Here you can select whether you want to fully action a sale straight away or just authorize a card before  manually actioning the full payment through Paypal s administration system once the goods are ready to be  dispatched     Live  Testing Mode  JShop Server does support Paypal s sandbox testing mode and this can be selected here     Checkout Locale    For each language you have setup in your JShop Server store you can select which language Paypal s own  checkout pages should be shown in here     Show JShop s Shipping Address    If selected  JShop Server will send any shipping address it already has  if the customer selected Paypal  Express whilst going through your own checkout  on the Paypal checkout pages     Page Style    Here you can enter the name of any page style you have setup at Paypal  If you do not have one  leave this  field blank     What Do I Need To Setup At PayPal     When you setup Paypal Express you need an API username  password and signature  These are setup in your  Paypal admin system by logging in  going to My Account   gt  Profile   gt  API Access   gt  Request API Credentials     gt  Request API Signature  Applying for a Centinel account in order to be able to use 3D Secure is also done  through your Paypal admin system     Integ
18.   and    Delete    button  In addition to these buttons there is an    Add New Courier    button at the bottom of the  list to create a new courier     6 10 1 Adding Editing Couriers    Adding and editing couriers is performed on the same screen     ttp    www royalmail co uk     Phone  0800 090 09090       Update Courier    Editing an existing Courier    Name  This is the name of the courier     Website URL    This is the website URL for the courier  It is most useful to enter a link that takes the customer directly to the  tracking page on the courier s website for ease of use     Additional Contact Information  If you wish to provide your customer with any additional contact information then you can use this free text  box     6 11 Suppliers General Settings    Within JShop Server the suppliers module allows you to assign suppliers to products  allowing you to email  suppliers to dispatch goods  in a drop shipping arrangement  Supplier emails only contain products particular  to that supplier and different email templates can be created for use with different suppliers     101    Taxi Shipping   Suppliers General Settings 102    The general settings screen sets up the main settings for the supplier system        Supplier General Settings    Activate Supplier System  If you wish to use the supplier system select YES here  otherwise select NO     6 12 Suppliers Email Templates    This is where you can setup email templates to use for supplier emails  You can setup any number
19.   new product price  If you decide to use a percentage change this will be calculated using the existing base  price set in the General Details block     Attribute Combinations    This is a feature we feel is unique to JShop Server  Like the Base Pricing Combinations here you can setup  combinations of options  or even a single option  and change the weight  product code  supplier   s product  code  stock level  minimum orderable quantity or maximum orderable quantity of the product  As you can see  changing the weight of a product if Large was selected would be very useful for shipping  changing the product  code is good for your own order management and changing the stock level allows you to keep track of the  stock levels for each variation of the product independently  In addition there is a sixth option in Attribute  Combinations that allows you to exclude a combination of items from being added to the shopping cart   Attribute combinations also act in a drill down fashion  For instance you could set the product code for all  products that have Large selected to one code  but also add in an option so if it was Large and Blue  the code  would again be different     any other combination with Large would use the code assigned to Large on its own   In this way JShop Server checks for the loosest match first  so by the time it has worked through all the  options it has selected the most specific for the selected options     One Off Prices    Acting in a similar way to the Ba
20.   option and JShop Server will take care of the sorting for you     86    Contents   Articles 87    Once you have created some sub articles via  the    Insert New Article    button you will see them appearing on  the article list  Clicking on the title of one of these will transfer you to the article browser for that article     To help you navigate the article browser the top title bar contains the full path to the current article you are  viewing and you can click on any of the previous article s titles to go back up to that level     5 16 2 Adding Editing Articles    Adding and editing articles happens on the same screen        erms  amp  Conditions     Overrides normal Title for Safe URL page links          Gu   D    2 Ay Ass SE A H z 3 A  A E B I U A Wi S      Article Home  gt  Bottom Links Pick Parent Artide   artide htm Le    The General Section of the Article Editing Screen    Title  This is the article title     87    Contents   Articles 88    SEO URL Title    If entered and you are using Safe URLs with the option to add names to URLs  this text will be used instead of  the article s title field for this text     Name  for Templates     This field allows you to set a simple name for the article to allow you to refer to it in your templates  This  feature allows you to quickly and easily edit the templates to provide additional link areas  In the default  templates the top links  bottom links and news section are all referenced in this way so their sub articles can  b
21.   t have to  pay the tax at the time of purchase  and account for it locally     Only if Countr uals   Here you can select one or more countries that this rule should apply to  You can multi select using the SHIFT  and CTRL keys as you would in any other application  In addition you can select    No Country Check    if you don   t  wish to restrict this rule to a given country or countries     H Field Match  amp  AND If Field Match    gt   This is where you can pick up on what the customer has entered into different customer fields to help qualify  the rule  Each line has three boxes  The first is the field you would like to check  the second is the type of  comparison you would like to do on the first and the third is the actual comparison value  The comparison type  drop down contains several selections     e Not Blank     Just checks that the field is not blank    e Equals     Checks whether the field equals the value entered  this comparison is not case sensitive    e Custom Regex     Allows you to enter a custom regular expression to match more complex scenarios   The rules are    ANDed    together which means that the customer   s entries have to match all the rules entered  here in order to satisfy the criteria     NOTE  The regular expression validation uses Perl style regular expressions  This has changed in version       2 3 0 from POSIX due to the depreciation of the ereg group of functions in PHP    146    Customers   Customer Fields    11 4 Customer Fields    JSh
22.   the dimensions that the image should be shown at the cart  Please note that the image will be re sized using  these dimensions only and not using GD     Dimensions When Shown In Navigation Bars  Product Thumbnail Only     The default templates show the product thumbnail image on the navigation bars on the store  e g  New  Products  Special Offers etc  This option lets you set the dimensions that the image should be shown at  Please  note that the image will be re sized using these dimensions only and not using GD     Upload Directories  This section of the screen allows you to set the default upload directories for the different image fields  Most of    the time you would not need to change these but if you have a lot of product images  for instance  you may  want to change the default product image directories for new uploads     51    General Settings   Cache Settings 52    4 23 Cache Settings    JShop Server includes a built in cache system to help ease the load on the server   s mySQL process for some  commonly used data and data that requires complex queries to create                         Your cache directory is currently set to   z  Development web IS5S systemjcache    NOTE  Directory must have correct permissions for cache to operate  Please see the documentation for more information on this    Ono    ves     IShop Server will automatically handle label cache validity     Ono    yes     IShop Server will automatically handle label cache validity    Ono    YES  Kee
23.   with the Validate For option  you can select how you want the field validated  There are a  number of built in validation types  such as Not Blank or Email Address and  in addition  choosing    Custom  Regex     allows you to enter a Perl style regular expression for the validation  permitting complex validation  routines to be used  If you are not sure how to use regular expressions or wish to find some for your particular  need a good site is http   regexlib com  where you will find many that you can enter here     Finally the Validation Message is the error message you wish to display if the validation or the field fails and  requires the user to re input information     NOTE  The regular expression validation uses Perl style regular expressions  This has changed in version       2 3 0 from POSIX due to the depreciation of the ereg group of functions in PHP    158    Checkout   Extra Order Fields 159    Internal Only a    Selecting YES for this option will mean that the field is not presented to the customer to fill in  Instead it will be  saved with an order empty and this can then be filled in by editing the order in the order management section  of JShop Server  This is useful if you need extra fields against an order to store other  internal information     Visible SSS  Setting this to NO will make a field invisible     Content  only available for SELECT type fields     This allows you to enter a list of options for a select box field  You can enter a new option by t
24.  Because the system is built into JShop Server it can track information specific to your store which would be  difficult for normal logging systems to do    2  The logging system uses a database table and hence can produce    live    results  By this we mean that you do  not have to wait for log reports to be generated each day and can see visits to your web site as they  happen     The log system also includes a built in graphing function     7 1 General Options  This section allows you to setup the main log system configuration options     Enable Visitor Logging  Ono    yes  Do Reverse DNS Lookup  Ono    yes    Ignore Referrers From Reports   ishop co uk whorl co uk   seperate search strings by a comma     Ignore IP s From Logs 192 0 0 1   hits From these IP addresses will not be logged     History To Keep When Pruning days     An automatic job for this must be active in  General   gt  Automated Jobs       Update Settings       Logs General Options    Enable Visitor Logging    If set to YES  JShop Server s visitor logging will be enabled and information about visits to your store will be  saved to a database  You should be aware that log information can grow very large so if you are short of  space this option should be turned off or you should operate a very strict time scale in which the logs are  cleared  see    Clear Logs      If this option is set to NO  no log information will be stored     Do Reverse DNS Lookup    Reverse DNS Lookup is used to find the details for th
25.  Box Functionality    As soon as JShop Server is installed it is a fully functioning store that you can add sections and products to   Obviously there are many features and settings in JShop Server that can change the way it operates but you  will be able to add product to your shopping cart and visit the checkout as soon as you ve added your first  product     Unique Web Based Administration System    Web based administration systems are nothing new but the interface for JShop Server takes them a step  further  Arranged more like an application the administration system is quick and easy to navigate and the on   screen features are intuitive     in fact it   s almost like using an application on line  A great deal of time and  effort has gone into creating the look and feel of the administration system and with unique features such as  interactive hiding and showing of information on the product page  administration doesn   t hinder your  productivity  it enhances it     Template Driven Design    JShop Server stores are designed 100  using templates  tSys is JShop Server s built in template system that  provides quick and easy additions to normal HTML to design your store  Of course you may only wish to change  small parts of the default templates but tSys   s power enables you to produce a completely unique looking store  should you wish to     In Built Order Management System    One of JShop Server s strengths is its in built order management system that provides everythin
26.  Deep We all love good programs about the animals that live in our    7  From the harshes deserts in the world comes some amazing    Deep in the 100  humidity of the jungle our photographers ca      All the fun of the jungle From leopards to elephants  giraff      Take a punt on the river or run your speedboat over a great       They are all around us and we constantly are in awe of the m    14  From camp fires in the Australian outback to gently lazing r    13       An example section listing screen  this is an ABC Section list     5 4 Invisible Sections Listing    This is displayed in the same format as the ABC Sections Listing but this one only shows those sections that  currently have their Visible field set to NO     5 5 Product Categories    Product categories allow you to categorise your product database  At the moment JShop Server only uses this  for Global Price Changes  see later in this section  but in the future the uses of Product Categories will be  enhanced to provide more functionality     List Of Product Categories    The list of product categories shows you all the current categories you have setup in your store  Each product  category has    Edit    and    Delete    buttons  The only exception to this is the default    General    category which  cannot be deleted     First Rate  General    Specials    Total Number of Categories        List of Product Categories    69    Contents   Product Categories 70    Adding   Editing A Product Category    Adding and ed
27.  JShop Server allows you to setup extra information fields against  sections  You can also change their display order by using the    Sort  Reorder Extra Fields    button     test test IMAGE    extratext Extra Text TEXT N    Total Extra Fields   Sort   Reorder Extra Fields    List of extra section fields       What Extra Field Types Are Available     There is a selection of different extra field type available and they are as follows     Note  Once an extra field has been setup you cannot change its type     4 9 1 Adding Editing Extra Fields    Adding and editing extra fields both use the same screen  However  when adding an extra field you need to  make sure that you select the correct type as this cannot be changed later on  You choose the type of an extra  field by using the select box by the    Add New Field    button        TEXT    extratext  Extra Text          Language  Outlandish          Update Field    Editing an extra section field    Information that can be entered for each field is as follows     Name  This is an internal name for the field and should not contain any spaces  This is not shown to the customer in  the default templates     Title    33    General Settings   Extra Section Fields 34  This is the public name for the field and the default templates use this when showing the extra field     Exclude From Loo   The default templates use a loop created with the tSys template language that loops through all your extra  section fields on the section page and 
28.  Note     With Force Compile On    uses the xTFC option so if this is not enabled in Template Settings then this    link will simply open the shop in the normal template mode  The same is true for    With Uncompiled On    as  well        126    Import Export   127    Getting information into and out of a new system is always important and this section provides both import and  export routines to help you in this     What Files Can Be Imported     The import routines in JShop Server accept any normal CSV file with Windows line breaks  If you are  preparing a CSV file from a Mac  you will need to ensure that Windows line breaks are used  otherwise this  may cause unexpected results when importing     9 1 Saving Import Export Layouts    Each of the import   export screens has a small section at the top which provides the ability to load and save  previously make import or export layouts  On any particular import or export screen previously saved layouts  applicable to the current import or export section will be shown in a drop down box and you can select one of  these and click the    Load    button to load it  Selecting one of the saved layouts and clicking    Delete    will allow  you to delete it        Update Product Images Stored Import Layouts  Thumbnail Import ze    a     3    Layout Management    Once loaded a further button will appear marked    Save     enabling you to save an updated layout to the same  name  Alternatively  you can use the    Save As    button to sav
29.  Of Banners    This screen shows you the currently available banners that you have setup        Name Size   Action    JShop Bannersdsds 120x60  i PAES    test 300 x 300 B RA    Total Number of Banners  2          The List Of Banners    Along with each of the banners is an    Edit    button to edit the banner   s details and a    Delete    button to remove  the banner from the system     184    Affiliates   Affiliate Banners 185    14 3 1 Adding Editing Banners    Adding and editing banners uses the same screen  The following fields are available for affiliate banners     y F    Uptoad  e   Pick or EE     C  Remove Image    width  Height     Small  easily manageable barner suitable for any site                  Banner Image    citcctive  commence       Image Size    Description             Available To  Affiliate Groups    General  High Profile       Editing an existing banner    Name  This is the descriptive name for the banner     Banner Image    The actual banner image itself  You have the option of clicking    Browse       to upload an image from your local  PC or clicking the    Pick Image       button to launch the in built image picker  The image picker will show the  banners directory contents and you can search for the correct image through that  if it has already been  uploaded  In addition you can enter a name directly into the Pick  field if you know it already exists in the  banners directory  The pick field will also accept a URL to an image if you wish to direct
30.  Option Selection      Special Offer Option  O New Product Option  Fi Top Product Option    Flag Selection     preview Only Product    O Available In Stores    d Red  d Black    Update Options       The Global Option Reset Screen    In addition  if you have product flags setup  you can reset those flags to NO in the same way     85    Contents   Articles 86    5 16 Articles    Articles is JShop Server s content management system that allows you to quickly and easily add and maintain  informational pages on your site  You could use this for help articles  delivery information  your terms and  conditions  frequently asked questions  news etc  Articles provides a unified way of providing all this content  and  in conjunction with different templates for different content types and with the options available against  articles  and sub articles  you can use the same system to deliver a wealth of different types of content  In  addition JShop Server s Articles system provides you with ways of grouping like links together to use as  collections on the front end of your store and advanced options such as automatic RSS feed generation     5 16 1 Article Browser    The Article Browser provides you with navigation for all your content  When you first visit this section you will  see the main articles in your store     Account Type Selection    At the top right of the screen there is a drop down called    Account Type    with a    Show    button  This allows you  to limit the information
31.  Sage Pay   s VSP Direct  integration manual     17 4 25 SecureHosting  Server Requirements    There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with SecureHosting     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on a SecureHosting payment page  In the gateways resources SecureHosting     224    Payment Gateways   Gateways 225    directory in the JShop Server installation are two template files both of which you should upload to your  SecureHosting account  You may edit them but they provide the basic functionality for the integration with  JShop Server     Settings Page Details    SecureHosting SH Reference Number    This is the account number   username issued to you by SecureHosting when you signed up for an account  with them     SecureHosting Check Code  Again  this is issued to you by SecureHosting and can be retrieved from your SecureHosting administration  system     Template File Name    This is the name of the template you wish to use for the payment page  Most people should leave this as  template html     the default template file that comes with JShop Server is already called template html    What Do I Need To Setup At SecureHosting     You should not need to setup anything at SecureHosting in order for transactions to be successfully processed     17 4 26 SecureTrading    Server Requirements  There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with SecureTrading     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details 
32.  Set to NO  the customer will be returned to the page they were viewing  if possible      58    General Settings   Basket Settings 59    Associated Products    Show Associated Products    This option allows you to show associated products on the basket screen  It selects from the full list of  associated products for all products in the basket     Maximum Associated Products To Show  Limits the number of associated products selected to this number     Select And Sort By    As you would not really wish to show all the associated products for the products in the basket  this option lets  you dictate how you want them selected and sorted  The options are as follows   Product Name  Product Code  Price  High to Low   Price  Low to High   Associated Position and Random     Associated Position sorts and selects according to the positioning  For instance  all those products that appear  at the top of the associated products lists for products will be selected before those appearing below the top  spot  and so on     Random is a special option that   s useful if you wish to show constantly changing associated products on the  basket page  By selecting random  JShop Server will randomly choose one of the other Select and Sort By  options each time the page is loaded  By doing this the products  and the order in which they appear  will  change as the different options are used     4 29 Review Settings    JShop Server includes the ability for registered customers  those with a customer a
33.  Settings   Currency Settings 27    The main screen gives you an overall view of the currencies setup in your store including the currency code   descriptive name and whether or not the currency is calculated via  an exchange rate  There are buttons for  editing a currency  deleting a currency or adding a new currency     Default Currency Ch     Changing The Default Currency       The bar at the bottom of this screen allows you to change the default currency  When a visitor first arrives at  your store this will be the currency they initially see all prices in     4 6 1 Adding Editing a Currency    Adding and editing a currency both use the same screen  The only difference is that when editing the base  currency some of the options  such as exchange rate settings  are unavailable as they are not applicable   Information required on this screen is as follows     150 Code    150 Number e g  826   GBP  Required For some gateways   Name United States Dollars    Decimal Places  Pre text  Middle text  Post text    visible Ono    ves  Can Checkout In Currency     yo O yes    Use Exchange Rate      Exchange Rate 1 607156    Update Currency    Editing an existing currency       ISO Code    This should be the ISO 3 letter code for the currency  This needs to be correct as when using payment  gateways  most require this field to be sent and if it isn   t accurate the gateway will not pick up the correct  currency for the transaction  Whatever you enter here will automatically be convert
34.  Silent POST  Tick the check box   Silent POST URL   see the JShop Server settings page for the gateway for the URL      17 4 30 2 Verisign Payflow Link Australia    Server Requirements  There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with Verisign Link     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on Verisign payment page     228    Payment Gateways   Gateways 229    Settings Page Details    Login ID  This is your Verisign Login ID     Partner  This is your Verisign Partner name     Transaction Type  Choose between one of the available options for transaction type     Sale  Authorisation  Delayed Capture     Description  The company name you wish to display on the Verisign payment page     What Do I Need To Setup At Verisign     On the details page for Verisign Payflow Link Australia in JShop Server you will be given details that you need  to enter into your Verisign administration  These are entered into the Account Info   gt  Payflow Link Info section  of the Verisign Administration  They are as follows     Return URL Method  POST   Return URL   see the JShop Server settings page for the gateway for the URL   Silent POST  Tick the check box   Silent POST URL   see the JShop Server settings page for the gateway for the URL      229    Currency Exchange Services   230    This section describes the live currency exchange rate services that JShop Server supports  Some of these  services require extra setup  normally in your services adminis
35.  This option allows you to set what status the order should be set to when this payment option is used  By doing  this you can trigger certain processing to happen straight away for certain payment methods or highlight an  order in a particular way on the Orders screen     Route Through Gateway  only available for the credit card option    This allows you to set up how the credit cards will be processed  The select box lists the currently supported  payment gateways along with an option called    Offline     If you plan on taking credit card details yourself and  processing them manually then    Offline    is the option you should choose  You should only choose one of the  other options if you actually have an account with that payment gateway     Once you have set a payment gateway on this page  a green    Settings    button will appear on the Credit Card    line on the List Of Payment Options screen  Clicking this button will allow you to setup integration details for the  payment gateway  For more information on this see the    Payment Gateway    section of this documentation     12 4 Credit Card Fields    Note  This screen is only applicable if you are using the    Offline    method for Credit Cards or if you re using a    payment gateway where credit card details are taken directly on your site  please see the    Payment  Gateways    section for details on this         This screen lets you setup the credit card fields that you would like to present the customer with on t
36.  a    Dispatch    button will appear in the Process column on the  order list page  Clicking this and OK   ing the confirmation box that will appear will mark the order as dispatched  and you will be returned to the orders list page     Dispatch Tracking Activated    If the dispatch tracking functionality has been activated  clicking the    Dispatch    button will bring up an  intermediate page that allows you to enter the dispatch tracking information that can  in turn  be included on  the email sent to the customer  This also pulls on the Courier information which is setup in Tax Shipping   gt   Couriers  Each order can have the following dispatch tracking information with it     Enable Tracking  If set to NO this will disable dispatch tracking for the order and dispatch tracking information will not be sent to  the customer     Tracking Reference  This is where you enter the tracking reference for the courier you have used to dispatch the goods to the  customer     Tracking Misc   This is a free field in case you need to give the customer any extra information about the dispatch     Courier    This lets you select the courier that you have used which allows both the courier name and contact details to  be included in the email to the customer     Allow Partial Dispatches    If this option has been turned on the intermediate page after clicking the    Dispatch    button will contain a basket  at the top  This will detail the order lines and quantities that are left to dispa
37.  be added to your account      What Do I Need To Setup At Paypoint     In your Paypoint administration system you should go to Change Remote Passwords and set the following   Which Password Type     Select    Digest Key    and enter a digest key password  this needs to be the same as you enter into JShop  Server   s Paypoint settings page otherwise JShop Server will not receive payment notifications correctly       218    Payment Gateways   Gateways 219    17 4 19 2   PayPoint Metacharge  Server Requirements    There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with Paypoint     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on Paypoint s payment page     Settings Page Details    MCPE Installation ID  This is the installation ID provided to you by the payment gateway     Mode    Paypoint have 3 transaction modes  Use    Test Mode  Success     to test successful transactions  use    Test Mode   Failure     to test failed transactions and use    Live Mode    to use your Paypoint account live     Authorisation Mode    Paypoint have 2 authorisation modes     Auth with Capture    takes the payment straight away     Pre Auth    secures  a nominal payment on the credit card until fully released by yourself in the Paypoint administration system     Order Description    This is a free text field to describe the order for the customer     What Do I Need To Setup At Paypoint     In your Paypoint administration system you should go to Settings Account Managem
38.  characters a customer can enter into the field     Validation  Validate For and Validation Message   If you want to make it a requirement that a field is filled in you should select YES for the Validation radio  button  In addition  with the Validate For option  you can select how you want the field validated  There are a  number of built in validation types  such as Not Blank or Email Address and  in addition  choosing    Custom  Regex     allows you to enter a Perl style regular expression for the validation  permitting complex validation  routines to be used  If you are not sure how to use regular expressions or wish to find some for your particular  need a good site is http   regexlib com  where you will find many that you can enter here     Finally the Validation Message is the error message you wish to display if the validation or the field fails and  requires the user to re input information     NOTE  The regular expression validation uses Perl style regular expressions  This has changed in version    2 3 0 from POSIX due to the depreciation of the ereg group of functions in PHP       12 7 Create Edit Gift Certificates    Both adding and editing a gift certificate use the same screen although when editing a gift certificate some of  the fields cannot be changed  When editing a gift certificate the bottom of the editing screen will also give a  breakdown on the orders that the gift certificate was used on  how much was used and how much is left on  the certificate     
39.  combinations for already  existing products in the system  Your import file should use either the productID field or the product code   code  field to link to ensure that the information is linked correctly to the product record     For the accTypelD field you will also need to use the correct account Type ID  which is a number  You can use  0 for    All Accounts        For your option fields you should enter the text version of the option and only a single option can be entered  for each field on each row of the import  They must match exactly or the record will not be imported     130    Import Export   Importing 131    NOTE  Importing base pricing combinations for a product will cause already existing base pricing    combinations for that product to be removed before the import  Only products that exist in the import file  will be affected  other products will remain unchanged        9 4 8 Update Attribute Combinations    This import screen provides you with the ability to import different attribute combinations for already existing  products in the system  Your import file should use either the productID fields or the product code  code  field  to link to ensure that the information is linked correctly to the product record     For your option fields you should enter the text version of the option and only a single option can be entered  for each field on each row of the import  They must match exactly or the record will not be imported   The type field describes what th
40.  delete different paperwork templates  Paperwork  templates should be stored in the main templates directory for JShop Server     Name   Template File   Action     5 Fold receipt  html ED D  avery avery  html ED D  Delivery Note Delivery_note  html ED D  Labels aaa  html ED D    Total Paperwork Templates               Extra Order Paperwork List    45    General Settings   Extra Order Paperwork 46    4 19 1 Adding Editing Paperwork Templates    Adding and editing order paperwork templates use the same screen  The options on the screen are        Name  Template For Paperwork   adysearch html v    Update Paperwork Template       Extra Order Paperwork List    Name    This is the name you would like to give to the paperwork  and is shown in the select box on the Order  Administration screen for you to select it and print orders using it     Template For Paperwork    Here you should select the template  from the standard templates directory  that you would like to use for the  paperwork  Please see the Templates Variables And Attributes section of the documentation for special  information about working with templates for paperwork     4 20 Digital Products Settings    JShop Server supports digital products allowing you to sell downloadable products  It automatically creates  download references for purchases of digital products and provides a number of ways of limiting how that  download reference can be used  In addition individual products can be set so that  when dispatching di
41.  extra section fields will appear  see the    General    section of the documentation for  more information on setting up extra product fields      1  Extra product fields of type TEXT will be shown as a single text line field    2  Extra product fields of type TEXTAREA will be shown as a multiple text line field into with HTML can also be  added    3  Extra product fields of type IMAGE will be shown in the same way as the normal Thumbnail and Image  fields  Images are stored in products extras however           OQaA ABlvoerlAVSlireAilMBwreseis  a7 o  a A   Paragraph     FortName     Sze zB i HES 3 S   E E E          Languages Part Of The Section Editing Screen    If you only have one language setup in your store  this section will not be shown  Otherwise it will present you    68    Contents   Adding  Editing Sections 69    with alternative language fields for the section title  short description  long description  Meta Keywords  Meta  Description and any extra TEXT or TEXTAREA fields you have setup     5 3 ABC Sections Listing    The ABC Sections Listing provides a full list of sections within your store in alphabetical order  Clicking on any  section title will show the Section Structure page for that section  In addition you will see    Edit    and    Delete     buttons for each section shown     Total selected sections  20  Viewing 1   10 D316    27 Animals Of The Sky From massive eagles to small robins and bats  we have a wide    4   Edit   Delete    26 Creatures Of The
42.  field at the time of ordering  In addition selecting this option will show this field on the delivery checkout page  for those customers who do not have accounts     Visible OO  Setting this to NO will make a field invisible     Content  only available for SELECT type fields     This allows you to enter a list of options for a select box field  You can enter a new option by typing it in the  Option  box and either pressing return or clicking the    Add    button     If you select an already entered option its contents will appear in the Option  box allowing you to change it   You can then click    Apply    to save that change     Content    GO       Donan  19    Content Section Available For SELECT Type Fields       In addition the three little buttons on the right of the content box allow you to move items up and down the list   changing their display order  or  by clicking the red X  to delete an item completely     152    Customers   Adding  Editing a Customer 153    11 6 Adding  Editing a Customer    Adding and editing a customer uses the same screen  You can add a new customer by clicking the    Add New  Customer    menu option and edit a customer from the customer listing   search pages                     Email Address    gareth whorl co uk    Password    Company Name 90890    Mr se        Forename   Surname   Address Line 1  areste  o E   Town   Cty   County   State   Country  Postcode   Zip    Telephone Number  01663 749726    Fax Number    Test Field         Retail
43.  for example  Both of these are separate shipping types   Once you have setup a shipping type you can then enter rates against those types for the different zones in  your store and that will be dealt with in the next section     3 4 Day  Special Delivery Eg Rates    Rates  Sort   Reorder Types    List of shipping types       The main shipping types page lists all the shipping types you have setup  according to the order in which they  should appear  the order can be changed by clicking the    Sort Reorder Types    button   Each shipping type has  an    Edit        Delete    and    Rates    button  The Rates button take you to the screen to enter rates for this shipping  type and this will be dealt with in the next section  In addition to these buttons there is an    Add New Type     button at the bottom of the list to create a new shipping type     6 9 1 Adding Editing Shipping Types    Adding and editing shipping types uses the same screen  The fields available are as follows     Name   EE   Value To Use  Quantity sl Round Up Values Ono    ves   Base Price cep 2 5447   usofe o897 _  euRf 7367 _  canees20     Available To Customer Type  Hide if above or equal to  0   ignore    0   Hide if below or equalto  0   ignore   H    Hide if above or equal to  0   ignore      epp DO   usolo oooo   euRlo oo00 CAN O 0000    Hide if below or equal to  0   ignore      GBPI0 0000 Us OO   EuR 0 0000 CANI0 0000     lt  Back   Update Sh pping Type       98    Taxi Shipping   Shipping Types 99
44.  for the cache directory      The XML for the sitemap will be stored in your cache directory so you should ensure that  this is writeable  The URL you should supply to search engines is     http    imac jshopserver dev230 sitemap php     Generation Date  x   Generation Date         ves fe    KI  Generation Date    i    If current sitemap older than  0 2  Jhour s    Enter 0 to turn off the automatic generation of the sitemap  If turned on the sitemap  will be regenerated when requested if it s older than specified number of hours        The XML Sitemap Screen    Sitemap Filename  You are shown here the URL you should use to submit the sitemap to search engines etc     Content To Include  For each type of page in your store you can specify a number of options that will be included in the sitemap     Include   Specify YES to include this page type in the sitemap  otherwise select NO to omit it    Priority  This specifies the priority of this type of page in relation to other pages on your site  Valid values are between  0 0 and 1 0     Last Modification    This sets what last modification date JShop Server should use for this page type  or it can be omitted  Search  engines may not use this information     53    General Settings   XML Sitemap 54    Change Frequency  This sets how frequently you want to suggest to the search engine that the contents on this page type  changes     Other Options    Automatically Generate New Sitema    Here you can specify  in hours  how often the s
45.  has been entered     Normal Price    This field allows you to enter a second price  maybe a normal retail price for instance  The template system  includes calculations and attributes that allow you to show the difference between this price and your selling    74    Contents   Adding  Editing Products 75    price  and also a percentage difference  This is useful if you want to show how much customers can save by  purchasing with you     One Off Price    In addition to the normal price for a product that is obviously linked to the quantity ordered  e g  3 of a product  would be 3 x Price  JShop Server provides the ability to include a One Off Price for the product that is not  linked to the quantity ordered  So  no matter how many of a product is ordered  this One Off Price will only be  added to the total once  This is useful for setup charges  for instance  This field allows you to enter any  applicable one off price  you can also change the one off price dependant on any options selected for the  product in the    Advanced Pricing Combinations    section of the product editing screen     Orderable Quantity   These two options  Minimum and Maximum  allow you to limit how many of a certain product can be ordered   Leaving either   s value at 0 will make JShop Server ignore that limit so  for instance  you could set a minimum  of 10 but no maximum  meaning that people could order any quantity as long as it was 10 or above     Weight  The weight of the product  JShop Server ma
46.  is http   regexlib com  where you will find many that you can enter here     Finally the Validation Message is the error message you wish to display if the validation or the field fails and  requires the user to re input information     NOTE  The regular expression validation uses Perl style regular expressions  This has changed in version    2 3 0 from POSIX due to the depreciation of the ereg group of functions in PHP       162    Checkout   Credit Card Fields 163    Visible  Setting this to NO will make a field invisible   Content  only available for SELECT type fields     This allows you to enter a list of options for a select box field  You can enter a new option by typing it in the  Option  box and either pressing return or clicking the    Add    button     If you select an already entered option its contents will appear in the Option  box allowing you to change it   You can then click    Apply    to save that change     In addition the three little buttons on the right of the content box allow you to move items up and down the list   changing their display order  or  by clicking the red X  to delete an item completely     12 5 Gift Certificate Settings    JShop Server includes a full gift certificate system that allows the purchase and redemption of either email   type or postal type gift certificates  please see the    Order Administration    section of this documentation for    more information    Enable Gift Certificates Ono    ves  Expiry In Days  0   never expire
47.  net when you signed up for an account with them     Password  This is your Authorize net account password     Test Mode    When set to YES no live transactions will take place via  Authorize net  Set to NO when you do wish to process  live transactions     Transaction Mode   This is the type of authorization to perform on the credit card     either a Full Authorization or a Pre  Authorization  With a Pre Authorization you will need to login to Authorize net in order to release the funds  when ready     What Do I Need To Setup At Authorize net     203    Payment Gateways   Gateways 204    According to Authorize net it is recommended that you set your    Password Required Mode    to TRUE in your  Authorize net administration interface  This requires the use of your password in order to submit an order via   the web through a system such as JShop Server     17 4 3 Banque Populaire RTS    Server Requirements  There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with this gateway     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on the payment gateway   s payment page     Settings Page Details    Internet Member Number  This is the number on your prima card  6 numbers     Merchant Activity Code  MCC     You will have received this with your contract  4 numbers     Contract Number  Business Number     You will have received this with your contract  10 numbers     Payment Type  The option selected here should match what you have been setup for with the B
48.  of different  templates and templates can be re used for multiple suppliers     Template Style 2       Default Template  2    Total Email Templates     List of Supplier Email Templates    The main screen shows a list of current templates along with Edit and Delete buttons     Adding   Editing Email Templates    102    Taxi Shipping   Suppliers Email Templates 103    Template Name Default Template  Subject Please Dispatch The Following Items For Us    Content i    order ordernumber    Text Version     order orderdate    order ordertime     Our Account Number   supplier accnum    lt  fif order products extrafields  content  neq blank  gt    lt  if order products extrafields type  eq  USERINPUT  gt    order products  extrafields title       order products  extrafields contentNative    lt   if  gt      lt  if order products extrafields type eq  SELECT  gt    order products  extrafields title      order products  extrafields contentNative    lt 8 if  gt     lt   ii               Content   HTML Version        Poesta S   E    Address   lt  Back   Update Template    Supplier Email Template Editing    Adding or editing an email template uses the same screen with the following options available     Template Name  This is the name you wish to call this template     Subject  This is the subject line for the email     Content  Text Version    Content  HTML Version   This is the actual body content for the email itself  If you only want to send a text version  leave the HTML    version bl
49.  only appear in the store once for consistency but products  can appear in as many sections as you want through an easy selector on the product information screen   Sections and products can be made invisible at any time should the need arise and both can also be setup to  only be available to certain customer types should you need that functionality  For instance you could present  some sections to wholesale customers that aren   t available to other customers  and the same for products     At first glance the product information screen may seem daunting but JShop Server categorises the settings  available against products and presents them in a concise and intuitive fashion     Please read this part of the documentation in depth as there are many powerful functions and settings within  Contents that you may otherwise miss     5 1 Sections Structure    The Sections Structure screen when it is first shown starts at the root of your store     the main section  This is  the section that the default templates use on the front page  index html      The Sections Structure screen is split into two     at the top you have a list of sub sections and at the bottom  you have a list of products  both applicable to the section you are currently viewing     Account Type Selection    At the top right of the screen there is a drop down called    Account Type    with a    Show    button  This allows you  to limit the information you see in the Sections Structure screen to only show products 
50.  organised by zone  for the selected  shipping type  the shipping type is shown in the page   s grey title bar      99    Tax  Shipping   Shipping Types 100    From Qty   To Qty   Pricing  Flat Rate  Action      All  Others   2 000000  3 214312  2 936876  6 800000    10   10 000000  16 071560 714 684380  34 000000  tia fe     1 1000   30 500000  49 018258  44 787359  103 700000 EI EERE  Total Rates        List of shipping rates for a shipping type    Addin Editing Shipping Rates       no Ows     If YES is selected  From and To will be ignored     Price  Flat Rate   cep 0 000000_  usp 0 co0000_  eurfo oooooo   canfo oooooo      All    Le fsct Insert Shipping Rate    Adding a new shipping rate       Adding and editing shipping rates is done on the same screen  Fields available on this screen are as follows     From  vi  Where x is the    Value To Use    setup for the shipping type  For instance  if the shipping type was using Quantity    then this would say    From Qty     In here you should enter the lower limit that this rate is applicable to  for  instance 1     To    x     Where x is the    Value to Use    setup for the shipping type  For instance  if the shipping type was using Quantity    then this would say    To Qty     In here you should enter the upper limit that this rate is applicable to  for instance  10     All  Others    If selected this rate will ignore the From and To values and will  instead  by used for any values that fall  outside any of the other rates  Th
51.  product s page but also the other way around  Those that you select like this  will have   lt   gt   shown after the product name in the list on the right     5 8 9 Misc  Options    Template For Product    product html v   Page          The Misc  Options Block  This section contains only one field     Template For Product Page  As with sections  you can set up different    product page templates if you wish and choose to show some products with one templates  and others with  another  The default template is product html     82    Contents   Adding  Editing Products 83    5 8 10 Other Languages    OO Gees el a alv oe MIO Bie     D 2 o  W A   Paragraph   Ford Name   Size   B HIE E Aa G amp   i 3 amp    38 ge       An Example Languages Block    If you only have one language setup in your store  this section will be empty  Otherwise it will present you with  alternative language fields for the product name  short description  long description  Meta Keywords  Meta  Description and any TEXT or TEXTAREA extra product fields you are using     5 9 ABC Products Listing    The ABC Products Listing provides a full list of products within your store in alphabetical order of product code  then product name  Clicking on any product code or name will show the product editing page for that product   In addition you will see    Edit    and    Delete    buttons for each section shown along with a    Clone    button  The use  of the    Clone    button is described in the    Sections Structure 
52.  products on an order as inventory within Quickbooks     Asset Account  This is the asset account to use for inventory items  if you are declaring products as inventory items      Cost Of Goods Account    This is the cost of goods  COG  account to use for inventory items  if you are declaring products as inventory  items      134    Import Export   Quickbooks Menu 135    Product Income Account  This is the the income  INC  account to assign products on orders to     Shipping Income Account  This is the the income  INC  account to assign shipping lines on orders to     Gift Certificate Income Account  This is the the income  INC  account to assign gift certificate orders to     Discount Account  This is the the income  INC  account to assign discount totals to     9 6 2 Quickbooks Export    This is the screen where you create the order export file for importing into Quickbooks     Select Output Method    Download File In Browser v   Save To Server only  7   Development web JSS system admin     Export Now       The Quickbooks Export Screen    Selecting Which Orders To Export    You can select orders either by date range  or by order number range  Which ever you select  ensure that you  have the correct radio button selected  by clicking on the relevant title  e g     Select By Order Numbers        In addition to the date range and order number range you can also specify only to export orders of a given    order status within the range specified  Use the    Order Status    drop 
53.  screen before they submit their  order     12 2 Extra Order Fields    When you first install Jshop Server an extra order field has already been created for you  This is the    I agree  to the terms and conditions    check box on the final ordering page  We have included this as an example of the  extra order fields and because it is a field that most people need  Any other extra order fields you setup will  also be shown on this final ordering page and any data entered saved with the order  unless you opt for them  to be    Internal Only    in which case you can edit these through the order administration system for any other    156    Checkout   Extra Order Fields    information you need to store against an order     There are 4 field types available  as detailed below     TEXTAREA Multiple row entry field  SELECT A select box of options  CHECKBOX Single check box    Each of the fields can be validated and validation messages displayed if they are not filled in        Single line entry field    List Of Extra Order Fields    The list of extra order fields gives you an overall view of the fields for the final ordering page along with an       Edit    button and a    Delete    button        Name   Title Type Action      terms I agree to the Terms and Conditions  CHECKBOX EN  e_asdas LeaveWith Neighbour IF Out CHECKBOX ED GEES         e_xzc234234 My Code TEXT ED ES  e_asdfas Nothing Option TEXT Ey Delete  Total Fields 4       Sort   Reorder Fields    Extra Order Fields List    
54.  select box by the    Add New Field    button     photographer  Photographer       Update Field    Editing an extra field  This shop has multiple languages as well       Information that can be entered for each field is as follows     Name    This is an internal name for the field and should not contain any spaces  This is not shown to the customer in  the default templates     Title  This is the public name for the field and the default templates use this when showing the extra field     Exclude From Loo   The default templates use a loop created with the tSys template language that loops through all your extra  product fields on the product page and outputs any content that they may have  However  sometimes you may  want to display one or two extra fields in a different way and by checking this to YES you can remove them  from that default loop in the templates and display them elsewhere on the page where you want to     31    General Settings   Extra Product Fields 32    Size  only for USERINPUT fields   Specifies the display size of the text input box     Maximum Length  only for USERINPUT fields     Specifies the maximum number of characters that the customer can enter into the USERINPUT field     4 8 2 Image Extra Fields  There are many additional fields available for the IMAGE type of extra field     IMAGE  imagetest2  imagetest2    Exclude From Loop   no O yes    Default Image ve Upload        C  Remove Image  Image Display Dimensions   x  vil   Jesus either x or y bl
55.  the  referrer is not your site  and not blank as some users legitimately hide the referring URL with privacy software   then a new session will be created  Although not perfect  this option is recommended as a simple check to  capture many instances of a user sharing a URL to your store that includes a session    Create New Cart ID On Login   Use this option to force the customer s session to obtain a new Cart ID if they login to a customer account  This  is useful for splitting sessions should the customer have shared a URL with their session ID and other checks  have failed to identify this  By creating a new Cart ID  their session is then guaranteed to be unique     Create New Cart ID On Checkout    Use this option to force the customer s session to obtain a new Cart ID when they start the checkout  procedure  This is useful for splitting sessions should the customer have shared a URL with their session ID  and other checks have failed to identify this  By creating a new Cart ID  their session is then guaranteed to be  unique     Customer Account Login Timeout   With this option set to a non zero number  it sets the number of minutes that a customer should remain logged  into their customer account  After this period of time has passed with no activity  either in their customer  account or checkout  the customer will no longer be marked as logged in into their account for their session  and they will need to login again if they wish to go to their account details or check
56.  then you should leave this field blank     It is always good practice to include a remove link in emails you send and JShop Server provides a way of  doing this  By including  removelink  in your newsletter  this will be replaced with a remove link particular to  the individual recipient that  when clicked  will automatically remove them from the newsletter mailing list     10 4 Subscribed Emails    This screen provides a listing of all the email addresses currently subscribed to your main customer  newsletter  In addition you can search by using the    Search Mailing List    section on the left hand menu of the  main screen which will provide the same Subscribed Emails list limited to the search you have entered     Total selected customers  35  Viewing 31   60  TOP        Email Action  summat whorl co uk EH  test whorl o uk ES  testorder whorl co uk ES  testsss jshop co uk EH Delete   yttttest whorl co uk ES  Total Number of Email Addresses    sl    List Of Subscribed Email Addresses    10 5 Un Activated Emails    Similar to the Subscribed Emails list  this list shows any email addresses that have been added but have not  yet been verified  This list will only contain items if you have activated the Double Opt In option in Newsletter     gt  Newsletter Options screen     10 6 Bulk Remove Emails    Should you wish to bulk remove email addresses from your mailing list you can do so with this option  You  simply need to provide a text file with a single email address per line
57.  through the top menu options  By default you can left click on these to visit  a particular administration section  e g  Users  or right click on them to see a sub menu for the section     10    Administration System   Administration System Layout 11     List of User Groups    Ue  Add New User Group  List of Users   Emails Add New User   Email Op Management Options  Email Tel view Actions Log File  Clear Actions Log File         gt General  gt  Contents  gt  Cu      gt  Import Export     er                                 HTML T  mpiarc gt  Order Emails  Template Settings ID  Email Type  Template Editing 1 Order Confirmatioi    Remove Compiled Subject  New Order P    2 Payment Confirme  Subject  Order  order    Snippets    Labels  3 Payment Failed frc    The Right Click Sub Menu  The Left Sub Menu    Once you have entered a particular section of the administration system  such as the User section for instance   the left hand part of the screen will show all the sub options available within that section  This provides a quick  and easy way to skip between screens within a particular section     This left menu can be turned on or off per user  please see the section on User Options     Main Content Area    This is where your main settings screens will be shown  All actions within JShop Server  such as setting  system options  editing products and processing orders is performed in the main content area     The Search Panel    The search panel provides quick and easy access to t
58.  to this  the following fields are editable     154    Customers   Unmoderated Reviews    Title  The title of the review that the customer entered     Review  The actual review itself that the customer entered             Author   Gareth Lancaster  Product   MOUNT6   Cloud Filled valley       Great product     Review   This is an absolutely fantastic product   ell done on providing it       Visible      yo O yes     lt  Back Update Review       Editing a review    11 10 Reviews by Product    155    This shows all reviews  irrespective of the visible flag  sorted alphabetically by product code and product name     As with the Unmoderated Reviews list there are    Edit    and    Delete    buttons for each of the customer reviews     155    Checkout   156    The Checkout section of the administration system gives you access to configuration options and settings for  the way the checkout procedures of your store should operate  This section includes any extra order fields   your payment options and gift certificate settings     12 1 Checkout Settings    This screen lets you set some of the global checkout options for your store     Allow One Step Checkout   no    Yes  NOTE  Customers without JavaScript enabled will use the multi step checkout    Show Summary Before Order Submit      yo    yes   One Step Checkout  i  Force Customer Account Creation    no    yes    Skip Payment Option Step IfOny      vo    yes  One Payment Type Available Note  If you are taking credit card details 
59.  type       All    and will only include sub articles also available to customer account type    All     RSS feeds re also multi   language            NO 8 YES  Will only be induded if available to    All    customer account type         Kmec 2 NO YES  Feeds only valid if customer account type is Af   ve  for  RS   ximum Entries in  Feed    Include Article in Parent RSS Feeds  If a parent article has an RSS feed activated for it  this determines whether this sub article will appear in the  RSS feed     RSS Feed Options  Indude Article in  arent RSS Feeds  ovide Sub Article  Depth Retrie 1   sor bk       RSS Feed Options section of Article Editing Screen    Provide Sub Article Feed    When turned on for an article an RSS link will be shown on the article page linking to an RSS feed for sub   articles  The article title will be used for the title of the RSS feed     Depth Retrieve  for RSS Feed  Sets how many levels down you want to include the sub articles from for this article s RSS feed        Maximum Entries in Feed  Limits the maximum number of entries included in the feed  They will be sorted by creation date time in  descending order     Field For RSS Content  Here you can set whether you would like to use the abstract or main content field for the description for each  entry in the RSS feed     5 16 3 ABC Articles Listing    The ABC Articles Listing provides a full list of articles within your store in alphabetical order  Clicking on any  article title will show the art
60.  upload a new logo  select which CSS colour scheme you would like to use and set a number of display  options for your store  The options available for each template set are up to the designer who created the  template set  so you won t always see the same options          amn era       Remove Image    Full width of the browser  css fullwidth css  e  Front Page Product Display o  Two columns  half width each    Two columns  half width each  v       Typical Edit Options Screen    118    Templates   Edit CSS File 119    8 6 Edit CSS File    This option provides a powerful yet simple editor for changing colours  fonts and various other display options  controlled by the CSS files for the templates  For more information on the technical side of the CSS editor  and  how to develop CSS files that support the extra features used by the editor please see the separate Templates  manual for JShop Server     Editing CSS File  default css blue css       General Tags  amp  Text    See    BB octtn   Pick    Font Styling       FONT WEIGHT    TEXT ALIGN  bold v  unset  v     FONT DECORATION    FONT STYLE    FONT VARIANT   unset  X  unset  e  unset  X  Padding  Top RIGHT BOTTOM LEFT    2px 2px 2px  Margins  Top BOTTOM     10px 5px  Borders     BORDER STYLING  SET ALL BORDERS THE SAME  STYLE     unset   solid   unset   solid     unset     o   27        o  o  o   27  o  o  o   27  o  o  o  o  o  V   27  o   27  VW  o  o   7      o  VG       ADDITIONAL CSS ATTRIBUTES    Left and Right Menus clea
61.  use  to pick the snippet out on a template  For instance  if you had a snippet called News  you can use   snippet News title  to show the snippet   s title and  snippet News content  to show the snippet   s content     Title  This is the title field for the snippet  This is optional and if you just want to make use of a snippet   s content that  is perfectly acceptable  You would normally only fill this in if you intend to use the title on your templates     Content  This is a long test field that can contain as much information as you like  including any amount of HTML     8 11 Labels    In contrast to snippets  labels are smaller pieces of text  up to 250 characters  that are used throughout the  default templates anywhere that text that does not come from the database is show on the page  Labels are  used to make multi language versions of your site much easier     each label can have alternative language  versions  if you are using multi language   This enables you to use one set of templates that can display in any  of your languages     In addition labels are also useful if you want to change some of the display text as you do not have to edit the  templates     as soon as you update a label the change will appear on the front end of your store     124    Templates   Labels 125    Of course  using labels isn   t compulsory and many might find that they do not want to use them if they aren t  using multi languages  In this case  you can simply replace the label in the t
62.  with Centinel to add 3D Secure support     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Payment details are taken on your own checkout pages     Settings Page Details    Payment Type    Here you can select whether you want to fully action a sale straight away or just authorize a card before  manually actioning the full payment through Paypal s administration system once the goods are ready to be  dispatched     Live  Testing Mode  JShop Server does support Paypal s sandbox testing mode and this can be selected here     Enable 3D Secure  If you have a Centinel 3D Secure account setup you can turn this option on  otherwise leave it off     Centinel Processor ID  The processor ID provided to you by Centinel Commerce     Centinel merchant ID  The merchant ID provided to you by Centinel Commerce     Centinel Transaction Password  The transaction password provided to you by Centinel Commerce     What Do I Need To Setup At PayPal     When you setup Paypal Pro you need an API username  password and signature  These are setup in your  Paypal admin system by logging in  going to My Account   gt  Profile   gt  API Access   gt  Request API Credentials     gt  Request API Signature  Applying for a Centinel account in order to be able to use 3D Secure is also done    217    Payment Gateways   Gateways 218    through your Paypal admin system     17 4 19 PayPoint  Enter topic text here     17 4 19 1 PayPoint Lite   Professional  Secpay     Server Requirements  There are no extra server requirement
63.  with Edit and Delete buttons     Action  Blackberry templates default    or Opera mobile  These checks are processed from first to last and stop at the first positive match   Advanced Template Defaults Listing       Adding   Editing Defaults    Adding and editing defaults uses the same screen  Here you can select any number of the browsers that JShop  Server recognises as standard  enter any custom browser detection strings and select the template set you  wish to use as the default     120    Templates   Advanced Template Defaults 121       Opera 9 x   Opera 7 x   Internet Explorer 8       Internet Explorer 6     Firefox 1 x      Firefox 3 x   Y  iPod Touch   _  Safari 4 x   Safari 2 x   Internet Explorer 5 5   _  Internet Explorer 4    Konqueror       Netscape 6 x    Opera 8 x   Opera   Internet Explorer 7  Google Chrome  Firefox 2 x   Firefox   iPhone   Safari 3 x   Safari   Internet Explorer 5  Internet Explorer  Netscape 7 x  Netscape 4 x                            ROBB EBEASEFAERAERAE80080 4             Enter words  separated by commas  to detect browser agents not currently picked up  by the default browser detection  For each option below   all words you enter must be matched for a positive match to be found    These checks are case insensitive        Editing a template default record    Recognised Browsers  All the browsers listed in this section are already detected as standard by JShop Server so you simply have to  click the checkboxes next to each one to select t
64.  you see in the article browser screen to only show articles specific to a particular  customer account type  This is useful for viewing the information that different customer accounts will see     Account WE a el Show    SEE  Sorted By  Created  Newest First     Visible  Sub artides   Action     Account Type Selector    The Articles Part of the Screen    Sorted By  Created  Newe             5 TopLink TopLinks Holder for sub articles for top links in default templates  2 Bottom Links BottomLinks Holder for sub articles for bottom links in default templates 2  Total Number of Articles         The Articles Part Of The Screen    Here you see the sub articles for the currently selected article  If you think of the current article as the parent   these are that article s children  The buttons at the top of this list do the following     Edit Article  This shows the article editing screen for the article you are viewing  For instance  when the  article browser first loads  clicking this button will edit the main article s settings  although generally you would  not use the main article in your store     Insert New Article  This shows the article adding screen and when created the added will appear in the list   making it a child of the currently viewed article     Sort   Reorder  This shows the reordering screen that allows you to move the sub articles up and down to    change their display order  However  if the parent article is not set to Manual Sorting    you will not see this
65.  you to enter a Perl style regular expression for the validation  permitting complex validation  routines to be used  If you are not sure how to use regular expressions or wish to find some for your particular  need a good site is http   regexlib com  where you will find many that you can enter here     Finally the Validation Message is the error message you wish to display if the validation or the field fails and  requires the user to re input information     NOTE  The regular expression validation uses Perl style regular expressions  This has changed in version       2 3 0 from POSIX due to the depreciation of the ereg group of functions in PHP    105    Taxi Shipping   Supplier Fields 106    Visible  Setting this to NO will make a field invisible     Content  only available for SELECT type fields     This allows you to enter a list of options for a select box field  You can enter a new option by typing it in the  Option  box and either pressing return or clicking the    Add    button     If you select an already entered option its contents will appear in the Option  box allowing you to change it   You can then click    Apply    to save that change     In addition the three little buttons on the right of the content box allow you to move items up and down the list   changing their display order  or  by clicking the red X  to delete an item completely     6 14 ABC Supplier Listing    The ABC Supplier Listing shows a complete listing page of all the suppliers in your system  
66. 0  discount to the most expensive  qualifying product from the  Requires Products  section that is in the cart    Qualifying Products  Discount   This will apply the specified discount amount  see below  to all the  qualifying products from the  Requires Products  section that are in the cart    Qualifying Products  Set Price   This will apply a fixed price to all the qualifying products from the   Requires Products  section that are in the cart     Amount    Here you can supply the actual discount either as a percentage or a fixed amount in any of the currencies in  your store  For  Qualifying Products  Cheapest Free  and    Qualifying Products  Most Expensive Free    this field  does not apply     Value Excludes Tax     Select YES here if the value you have entered  this does not apply to percentage discounts  should be used by  the system as including any tax already     Discount Tax   Select YES here if you want to discount tax as well as goods shipping values     Discount Active   Select YES to ensure that the discount is active in your store or NO to turn it off     Public Display OO oK  Select YES here if you would like the discount listed on your store  alongside products and sections that it  applies to and also include a link to the discount listing page for this entry     Usage Limitations    170    Checkout   Automatic Discounts 171          The Usage Limitations Section of the Automatic Discounts Screen    Valid From    If you wish to select a date when this disc
67. 13 Sort Top Products    This brings up the reordering screen for products you have marked as Top  see    Adding   Editing Products       You can move products and down  changing their display order  Top Products are shown in the default  templates on the right hand navigation menu for the store  but you can obviously show them anywhere you  like     5 14 Global Price Change    This is a powerful function and one that cannot be undone once it has been used  It basically allows you to  make a percentage price change  either plus or minus  to your product database     Product Selection    By Product Category       all Products    Percentage Change     bo           Update Prices    The Global Price Change Screen    The screen gives you the choice of either changing a particular category of Products or changing all the  products in the database     Note  We suggest using this function with caution and only if you are certain that you need to update  prices in this way  Using the Import   Export facilities you can update prices outside of JShop Server and  re import them  giving you greater flexibility over your price changes  If you do use this function we  suggest exporting the prices before the change so that they can be easily re imported again if need be        5 15 Global Option Reset    This function provides a quick and easy way of resetting special offer  new product and top product options  against products to NO  Once used these changes cannot be undone automatically    
68. 157    At the bottom of this screen there is also an    Add New Field    button along with a select box for the type of field  you would like to add     157    Checkout   Extra Order Fields 158    12 2 1 Adding Editing Extra Order Fields    Adding and editing extra order fields uses the same screen  However  some of the options are only available  for certain types of fields  Options available are as follows              CHECKBOX  terms      agree to the Terms and Conditions   Ono    ves    no Ows  Ono    ws       Validation          Validate For  Validation Message  Internal Only  Visible  Language  Spanish  Title          Validation Message       Editing an Extra Order Field    Name    This is an internal name that is used in the database  It must be unique and you will be told if it is not  This  field is not generally shown to the customer     Title  This is the description of the field that is shown to the customer in the default templates     Size and Maximum Length  only for TEXT type fields     Size is the actual size of the form field on the page and maximum length is the maximum number of  characters a customer can enter into the field     Columns and Rows  only for TEXTAREA type fields   This is the number of columns and rows that the field should be sized to on the contact form page     Validation  Validate For and Validation Message   If you want to make it a requirement that a field is filled in you should select YES for the Validation radio  button  In addition
69. 165    Checkout   Create Edit Gift Certificates 166                Ld  Delivery Details    eaat  SS    or        lt  Back   Insert Gift Certificate      Editing a Gift Certificate    The fields are as follows     Status  This is the current status of the gift certificate  The different states for a gift certificate are     e Activated  The gift certificate is active and can be used   e Not Activated  The gift certificate is not active and cannot be used     From Name  The name of the person the gift certificate is coming from     To Name  The name of the person the gift certificate is going to     Message    Any message to be put on the gift certificate     Amount  The amount of the gift certificate and the currency  if applicable  that this gift certificate is for     166    Checkout   Create Edit Gift Certificates 167    Expires         Expiry details for the gift certificate  If set to Yes  the expiry date can be selected from the three drop down  boxes     Type  Sets the type of the gift certificate  An email gift certificate is sent via  email to the recipient and a postal gift  certificate needs to be printed and sent to the delivery address  Please see the    Order Management    section for  more information on this     Delivery Details   These fields are for the actual delivery details for the gift certificate  If you have selected an email gift  certificate then you should fill in the Email Address field  Alternatively for a postal gift certificate you should fill  i
70. 173  Redeemed Codes Report    sss sssssssssunssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnm nnnm nnmnnn a 177  Reports 178  General Options scini a a a E a NANE A E O Daa AA E E Aai 178  Reports SUMMALY    ssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnm na 178  Clear Report Data    eeekkeEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEKRKREEEEERKREEEEREKREEEEREKREEEEERKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEEKEKREEEERRE 179  Individual Reports      eekREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRE 179       1997 2010 Whorl Ltd  Reproduction prohibited without permission     Part 14  14 1  14 2  14 3    14 4    14 5  14 6  14 7  14 8  14 9    Part 15  15 1  15 2  15 3  15 4    15 5  15 6  15 7  15 8    Part 16  16 1  16 2  16 3    Part 17  17 1  17 2  17 3  17 4    13 4 1 Order Summary Report   sssssssssssunannnnununnnnunnnnnnanannnnnnunnnnanannnnanannnnanannnnanannnnanannnnnnannnnanannn nananana anan 179   13 4 2 Stock Level Report   sssssssssssusununnnnnnannnnanunnnnunannnnanannnnnnunnnnanannnnunannnnanannnnanannnnanannnnanannnnanannnnananan nanan 180   13 4 3 Other Reports   ssssssssssnnnnununnnnanunnnnnnannnnanunnnnunannnnanannnnanunnnnanannnnanannnnanannnnanannnnananannnnanannanannnnananan nanan 181  Affiliates 182  General Options aaar Naaa A A ANENA KEANNA RENANE Aa AKENE KENN 182  Affiliate Groups oreca teen 183  Affiliate Banner        cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee 184   14 3 1 Adding Editing Banner  evsEESEEREEEEEREEEEEEEEEREEREEREEREEEEEEEEE
71. 91    Total selected transactions  17  Viewing 1   30       A typical list of affiliate transactions     Transactions  UnAuth   d     This shows a list of all un authorized affiliate transactions in date order with the newest first     14 9 Show Payment Due List    When you are ready to make payments to affiliates this report will show you a list of all the affiliates whos  balance is over the minimum payment amount  set in General Settings   Each entry shows how much is  payable along with the company name  payee and postal address  There is also a button for each entry called     Mark Paid    that will set the account as paid and send an email to the affiliate alerting them to the payment          Gareth Lancaster    Total Number of Payment To Be Made     A typical payment due list     191    Orders  192    JShop Server includes a comprehensive Order Management system that features automatic emails to  customers and merchants  dispatching with dispatch tracking and partial dispatching   back ordering  receipt  printing and order editing     The order management is designed to be quick and easy to use and  above all  productive  There is a  comprehensive searching mechanism always available on the orders screen and orders can be printed en   mass  Linked with the Checkout   gt  Extra Order Fields settings and Customer   gt  Customer Fields settings  the  information stored with each order that   s both publicly available to the customer and privately available to your  own o
72. A ePay    Server Requirements  You will require a secure server and CURL installed with SSL support in order to use the USA ePay payment  gateway     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken     Credit card details are taken on your site and authorisation happens between your server and USA ePay   s  server directly     the customer is never transferred to USA ePay   s servers     Settings Page Details    Source Key  Enter the source key as provided by USA ePay     Transaction Mode    USA ePay have 2 transaction modes  Use    Test Mode    to test transactions and use    Live Mode    to use your USA  ePay account live     Authorisation Mode    USA ePay have 2 authorisation modes     Sale    takes payment immediately     Pre Auth    reserves the payment on  the customer   s credit card until payment is released by yourself in USA ePay   s administration system     Email Customer  Select Yes if you want USA ePay to email the customer a confirmation as well as JShop Server     What Do I Need To Setup At USA ePay     There is nothing that you need to setup at USA ePay     17 4 29 UseCash    Server Requirements  There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with this gateway although to use the full security  offered you need to be running PHP version 4 3 0 or greater     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken     Customers do not pay with credit cards using UseCash  they print off a bardcode which they take to their  nearest PayZone to pay with cash  Your system is then autom
73. Credit card details are taken on the payment gateway   s payment page     Settings Page Details    Merchant ID  This is your merchant ID with the gateway     Transaction Mode    Whilst testing you can choose any of the Test Mode option to simulate the given response  e g  declined or  good  When you are ready to go live you should change this setting to    Live       Authorization Mode    Here you can choose been PreAuth  amounts are secured on a card but not taken  and Sale  amounts are  taken instantly from the customer   s card     What Do I Need To Setup At PSiGate     You should not need to setup anything at Optimal Payments in order for transactions to be successfully  processed     17 4 22 RBS Worldpay Select Junior    Server Requirements  There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with Worldpay     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on Worldpay   s payment page     Settings Page Details    Installation ID  This is the installation ID issued to you by Worldpay when you signed up for an account with them     Description    220    Payment Gateways   Gateways 221  This is the description of the order that will appear on the Worldpay payment page     Transaction Mode    Worldpay have 3 transaction modes  Use    Test Mode  Success     to test successful transactions  use    Test Mode   Failure     to test failed transactions and use    Live Mode    to use your Worldpay account live     Authorisation Mode    Worldpay have 2 au
74. EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE 91  Tax Shipping 92  Main Country List o ninaa EAE aA AER AAAA E ENNA KEANU ALAREN 92  Country Settings     cccccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeseeeaenesaeeseeeaaeeaeeesaeeaeneaaeeaeannneesenens 93  Reorder Countries s sesysissueorunrnnunudurane nana Nnn Enu nunnan ONOMA KREE KREE KR KEE KREE n HENE UNAN ONNEEN 93  Tax Menu General Settings        ssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnna 94  Country Level Tax issn AEAEE EEA REE ER 95  County   State Level Tax   ccccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeaeeesaeeseeesneeseeesaeeaeeeaaeeseonaneeanonas 95  Shipping Menu General Settings         cccccseseeeecseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseneneeeseneaneeannenneeeennas 96  Shipping Zones      eeeeeseeeeeeeee ee eeeeee seen eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeneeeaeeeaaeeaeeesaeeaeeeaaeeaeenaseeaeanas 96  Shipping Types    cceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeseeeaeeenaeeaeneaeeeaeeesaeesenesaeeseneaaeeseneaneesennas 98   6 9 1 Adding Editing Shipping Types  ss sssssssssssusunnnnnnnnnnnunanunnnnunnnnunanunnnnannnnnnunannnnannnnnnannnnnnannnnanannnnnnanan na 98   6 9 2 Shipping Rates   ssssssssssssnnununnnnnnununnnnunannnnanunnnnannnnnnanannanannnnnnanannananannnnannnnananannnnannnnnnanannananannananannanan anna 99  Couriers oireisiin aeaa aa Eaa Ea aa AO ARNAN KAA AE EAER EAE Nai 101   6 10 1 Adding Editing Couriers    sssssssssssssusunnnnunnnnnnanannnnanunnnnanannnnanannnnanunnanunannnnannnnnnannnnnna
75. EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEREEREEEEEEEEEEEEn 185  Affiliate Fields        cccccseeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeseeeseaeeeeeaeaeeeeeaeaeseeeaeaaeeeeaeaaseeeaeaaeeeeaeaeeeeeaenneee 185   14 4 1 Adding Editing Affiliate Fields        ssssssusensusnnnnnununnnnununnnnunannnnunannnnunununnanannnnanannnnnnannnnanannnnnnnnnnnan an 187  Adding  Editing an Affiliate          ssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnna 188  Affiliate Lists nana AEEA AE REE A E t 189  Creating  Editing a Transaction         s sssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn a 189  TRANSACTIONS serenor reida nnar NENA EAE EKAIA EA ArAnA EEEE KI n EAn A OEN EANNA NEEE EAEAN 190  Show Payment Due Let  eerkeeEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEERKKREEEERKKREEEERKKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERKKREEEERRE 191  Orders 192  Orders LiSt E E EE E E E E E E ee eeaeaeeeeeneee 192  Order Searching  eepreekkeEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEERKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEEKRKREEEERRE 193  Accessing an Order s Details       sekREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEERKKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEEREKREEEERRE 194  Editing Orders       cccccesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeaeeeeeaeaeeeeeaeaeeeeeaeae ee eeaeaeeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaeeeeeneeeee 194   15 4 1 Adding Product      sssssssssssennnnununnnnnnannnnanunnnnunannnnnnannnnununnnnanannnnnnannnnanannnnnnannnnanannnnanannnnanannnnananan nanan 195   15 4 2 Product Details Screen      ssssssssssssssnnnnununnnnunannnnunannnnununnnnanannnnn
76. ELECT  gt   forder  products  extrafields  title      rJ M         Content   HTML version            Recipient Email    Address es  If custom  send to these email addresses     From Reply To Email   jinfo whorl co uk  Address     lt  Back   Update Template    List of Email Templates    Fields available when editing an email template are as follows     Subject  This is the subject for the email  This can include template attributes etc     Content    This is the normal text only version of the email  If you do not wish to send a text only version of the email   although it is advisable to have a plain text version for those customers who do not have HTML compliant  email software  then leave this field blank     Content HTML    If you wish to have an HTML version of an email you can enter the HTML for the email here  If this is left blank  no HTML version of the email will be sent     Recipient Email Address es   A number of options are available here from the drop down     e Customer     The email will be sent to the customer    e Merchant     The email will be sent to the default merchant email address  set in Templates   gt  Email  Options    115    Templates   Email Templates 116    e Special     Available for some email types  e g  use Special to send an emailed gift certificate to the intended  recipient    e Custom     Select this if you d like to enter a different email address to send the email to in the box below  the drop down     From  Reply To Email Address    Thi
77. ERKKREEEERKKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEEKRKREEEERRE 117  Edit Option        cceeceeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeaeaeseeeaeaeseeeaeaeeeeeaeaeeeeeaeaeeeeeaeaeeeeeneeeneee 118  ECE  CSS EE 119  Advanced Template Defaults       sssssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn mnnn nnna 120  Template Editing e erekkeEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEERKREEEEREKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEEREKREEEERKE 121  Remove Compiled   erekkREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEERKKREEEEERKREEEEREKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEEKRKREEEERRE 123  SMIPPetS E E E E E E E E E E E E E 123  8 10 1 Adding Editing Snippets    sssssssssssssunnnnunnnnnnunannnnanunnnnunannununannnnunnnnununannnnannnnnnannnnnnannnnanannn nanasan nanan 124  label curon E OEE AE EEEO 124  Open E TTT 126  Import Export 127  Saving Import Export Layout           cccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 127  The Main Fields Boxes      aeEREREREREREEEERERREREREREREEEERERREREREREREEEERERRERERKREREEEEEERRERERKEEREEEE EEN 127  Additional Import   Export Information            cecse eee 128  IMPOSting      eceee sees sees eee eee eraan aE ARNa Aana KA nEn EO A ANAA ANN ENNA AKARE ERA Aai 128  9 4 1 Update Product Images    ssssssssssnsnsununnnnunnnnnnnnannnnanunnnnunannnnanannnnannnnanunannnnannnnnnannnnnnannnnanannnnnnanan nanan 129  9 4 2 Update Stock LevelS      ssssssssunsunununnnnununnnnanunnnnanannnnanunnnnnnannnnanannnnannnnanunannnnannnnnnanannnnannnnanannn nanana nanan 129  9 4 3 Update Main Pricess   sssssssnsusunsununannnn
78. JShop Server will strip any PHP blocks from the  uncompiled versions of your templates before parsing and processing  We recommend using this option for  security reasons  especially on shared servers where 777 permissions create cross account security risks due  to poor server side security  We strongly recommend that if you are on a shared server and have to use 777  permissions on the template directory that you set this option to YES     8 4 Installed Template Sets    The Installed Template Sets menu option provides you with access to all the template sets you currently have  installed for your JShop Server installed  By default a single template set is installed with JShop Server  although you can create your own additional sets or find others that have been produced for use with the  system  We will be launching a template shop later in 2009 to provide access to further high quality templates  ready for use with JShop Server  For more information on developing template sets  or altering the default  templates  please see the separate Templates manual for JShop Server     The main screen provides you with an overview of the template sets installed  including a thumbnail  representation of each one  some information and a description for each set and a number of options  The set  shown at the top of this list in a darker colour is your currently selected default template set  the set used by  your store when somebody visits   If you have more than one set installed  each 
79. Mar 2007  gazi whorl co uk 10 Feb 2006  gaz2 whorl co uk 10 Feb 2006  gaz3 whorl co uk 10 Feb 2006  gaz4 whorl co uk 10 Feb 2006    gaz5 whorl co uk 10 Feb 2006   gaz6 whorl co uk 10 Feb 2006   gaz7 whorl co uk 10 Feb 2006   gareth44 jshop co uk 08 Feb 2006   gareth45 jshop co uk 08 Feb 2006  Total Number of Customers        A typical list of customers    11 9 Unmoderated Reviews    If you are operating the review functionality of Jshop Server along with the setting that allows reviews to be  moderated  please see the    General    section for more details on customer reviews   this will display a list of  currently unmoderated reviews  those reviews with the visible flag set to NO      Total selected reviews  5  Viewing 1   10    31 Oct 2003 LAKEG   Lake Ride  31 Oct 2003 NEB4   Start Birthing Clouds    Gareth Lancaster 02 Apr 2003 MOUNTE6   Cloud Filled Valley  Gareth Lancaster 02 Apr 2003 DEEP1   Angel Fish   Joe Bloggs 31 Mar 2003 LAKE1   Lake Reflections  Total Number of Reviews        Unmoderated Review List    From this list you can see the author  the date the review was made  the product it relates to and the rating  given  In addition there are    Edit    and    Delete    buttons available for each of the reviews     Once either deleted or edited and the visible flag set to YES the review will disappear from this list     Editing Reviews    The edit review screen shows the author of the review  the product code and name and the rating the  customer gave  In addition
80. NOTE  The order is never actually changed until you click the    Update Order    button at the bottom of the       main details screen  Only at this point will the order actually be changed     15 4 1 Adding Products    Next to the    Update Order Lines    button you will also see an    Add Products    button  Clicking this brings up a pop   up window containing a product search where you can search for products to add to the order    Against each product you will see either an    Add To Basket    or    Select Options    button  The    Add To Basket     button will only show for those products with no selectable options against them  For those that do have  selectable options you can click the    Select Options    button to show the product detail screen     Total selected products  149  Viewing 31   45  a343   ile  aan    Code  amp  Name Price Action  CG3 Magpie on Rock   23 33 ex  tax    27 41 inc  tax   CG4 Badger Waiting   24 97 ex  tax    29 34 inc  tax   CS Poised Squirrel   24 99 ex  tax    29 36 inc  tax   CG6 Dozing Cat   24 99 ex  tax    29 36 inc  tax   CG7 Furry Mole   26 67 ex  tax    31 34 inc  tax   DEEP1 Angel Fish   29 16 ex  tax    34 26 inc  tax   DEEP2 Picasso Trigger Fish   30 83 ex  tax    36 23 inc  tax   DEEP3 Basking Shark   16 66 ex  tax    19 58 inc  tax   DEEP4 Shoal Of Jellyfish   24 99 ex  tax    29 36 inc  tax   DEEPS Displaying Whale   29 98 ex  tax    35 23 inc  tax   DEEP6 Happy Dolphin   23 00 ex  tax    27 03 inc  tax   DEEP  Basking Anenom
81. On Front End    If set to YES  the normal template compile mode can be overridden and forced to use the    Force compilation  each time    mode  You would normally set this to NO if you did not need to use the xTFC option  for security  reasons     Allow xRTU Command On Front End    If set to YES  the normal template compile mode can be overridden and forced to use the    Run templates  uncompiled    mode  You would normally set this to NO if you did not need to use the xRTU option  for security  reasons     116    Templates   Template Settings 117    Convert Line Breaks To  lt br  gt  on Snippets   Setting this option to YES will change all line breaks in Snippets to  lt br  gt  tags before they are sent to the  template system for display  This is useful if Snippets will normally be edited by people who are not  comfortable with HTML and just want to enter paragraphs of text  Setting this option to NO will mean that line  breaks will not be converted and so you will have to enter  lt br  gt  tags yourself in order to create paragraphs or  breaks in text  In both modes Snippets can  of course  contain any other HTML you want to use     Note  If you have the WYSIWYG editor turned on  this option will have no effect     Strip HTML Comments When Outputting  With this option turned on  anything contained in normal HTML comments in your templates will be stripped  from the resulting page output     Disallow PHP in Templates   With this option enabled  the tSys template system in 
82. Recent View Settings ERR EEEEERKREEEEERKR KEE KREE EEER KREE KREE EEERKR KEE KREE KR nnmnnn nnna 59  Users Online Settings        ccccceeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeeeaaseeeeeaaeeeeaeaaseeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeees 60  Send to a Friend Fields         cscsseseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesneeaeeeseeeaeeesaeeseeesseeaenesaeeaeneaneeanonas 61   4 32 1 Adding Editing Send to a Friend Fields    s sssssssssususnnnnnununnnnununnnnananunnununnnnunannnnnnannnnanunnnnanannnnannn n 61  Contents 63  Sections Structure     cccccseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeesneeaeeeseeeaeeesaeeaeeeaaeeaeeesaeeaennaaeeseneaneesnonas 63  Adding  Editing Sections             eeeee eee eee 66   5 2 1 Extra Fields E 68   5 2 2 Additional Languages    sss ssssssusunnunununnnnununnnnunnnnnnannnnanannnnnnnnannnnanannnnannnnunanannnnannnnnnanannnnanannanannn nanan an na 68  ABC Sections LISting osaeran eeren EEEE KEANE NOE ANENE AREEN 69  Invisible Sections Listing e exeekkEEERKREEERKREERERKREERERKREEEREREREERREREREERREREEEERREREREERRERKKEEEN 69  Product Categories         eskREEEERKKREEEEERKREEEEERKREEEEERKR KEE KREE KREE KANEEN EALAN KANNEN Ua ENEE 69  Prod  ct Hags      eeekkEEEERKKREEEEKKKREEEEERKR nunna KREE Aie EN OUNAE AHA KREE KR KEE KREE KR KEE AEREOS 70  Edit Template Product      eeeeekkeeKRKREEEEEKKKEEEEERKKEEEEERKREE ERR KREE KR KEE KREE KREE KREE ERKREn 71  Adding  Editing Products      eeerkeeEERKKREEEEKKKREEEERKKREEEERKKREEEEKKKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEEERKREEEERRKREEEERRE 71   5 8 1 General D
83. Shop Server    simple  effective  e commerce    2 3 0 User Manual    Documentation Version  2 3 0   Revision Date  29 10 2010       2003 2010 Whorl Ltd     No part of this documentation may be reproduced without the express written permission  of Whor l Ltd      This product includes PHP  freely available from http   www php net      mySQL  Xitami  phpMyAdmin  Linux  Apache  Windows  Quickbooks are copyright their respective owners   InnovaStudio WYSIWYG Editor is   2007 INNOVA STUDIO  Used under license  The InnovaStudio WYSIWYG  Editor may not be used outside of JShop Server without separate licensing from InnovaStudio    http   www  innovastudio com         2 3 0 User Manual   Contents    Part 1    Part 2    2 1  2 2    Part 3  3 1  3 2  3 3  3 4  3 5  3 6  3 7  3 8    Part 4  4 1    4 2  4 3  4 4  4 5  4 6  4 7    4 8    4 9    4 10    4 11    Introduction 9  Administration System 10  Administration System Layout    sskkeeEEKKKREEEERKKREEEERKKREEEEERKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEEERKREEEEKRKREEEERRE 10  User Options  sssaaa ana Eara EEANN SEKAAN ENa ANNONE aE ETEA UNEA ENANS 12  User Management 13  The Administrator ACCOUNT     ssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 13  List Of GrOUPS    cccseceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaseeeaeaaseeeaeaaseeeaeaaseeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeas 13  Adding  Editing a Group     sssssssssnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnna 14  List Of USCIS soirerneekresanedunar
84. To View Shop Even When Unavailable   This setting allows you to provide limited access to your store  for instance if you   re doing a lot of updates that  you don   t want seen during their change  You can make the shop unavailable with the previous option but enter  a comma separated list of IP addresses that will still be permitted access to the store and see it as normal     Force Admin System to Use SSL    If you have setup your store with a secure certificate  and have entered the secure URL in the required place in  the config php file for the system  please see the Installation section of this manual  then setting this option to  YES will force the admin system to be used under SSL     20    General Settings   Global Options 21    Default Settings    Order Number Offset    Internally orders are stored starting at order number 1 as we use mySQL   s own auto numbering sequence   Here you can set a number that should be added to the 1 when order numbers are displayed  For instance  the  default is 200000 so all order numbers viewed in the administration system or on the front end of your shop  will display by adding 200000 to the internal order number  For example order number 1 will display as  200001     Default Country  When new customers visit your site this is the country they will be assigned until they log in or order from your  store  This is used to calculate any tax that should be shown by default     Shop URL Format  amp  Search Engine Friendlyness    Omit Sec
85. a     Update Settings       50    General Settings   Image Settings 51    Image Settings    Image Fields    For each type of image there are a number of settings that can be changed on this screen     Default Image   This allows you to select a default image that will be shown on a product page if no product specific image has  been uploaded for this field via the product editing screen  You can either upload an image from your local  computer here or pick one that   s already been uploaded     Image Display Dimensions   This specifies how you want the image displayed on the screen  If you only provide one of the options then the  image will be constrained to that size and the other dimension will scale to fit  For example setting    x    to 300  and    y    to 0 will lead to the image always being shown 300 pixels wide but will allow the height to change  accordingly  so the image always stays in relative scale     Resize Images At Upload   If you have GD enabled on your PHP installation you can use this option to have images uploaded for this field  automatically resized to the dimensions entered in the option above  This means that the version that   s stored  on the server will be the correct dimensions already  In addition you can get a quality setting that will be used  if the uploaded image is a JPG file     Dimensions When Shown In Cart  Product Thumbnail Only    The default templates show the product thumbnail image on the cart html template  This option lets you set
86. about  each product  JShop Server splits the product page up into sections  Each section contains a particular group of  options and settings and these can be individually rolled up or shown by clicking on the    show    and    hide    links  next to each section   s title     Product Sections Hidden   Section  Add   Edit   Clone    eee General Details a  Extra Fields a  Digital Download Options  Group Product Settings  C   Advanced Pricing  Stock Control  Product Options  Associated Products    Misc     O  O  oO    BU    D B B O O B B    a  0  0  0  LI    Other Lanquages    Default Check 2 way Links  For Associated Products Ono    ves    Update Settings       Product Editing settings  a unique feature of JShop Server    The Product Editing options allow you to setup which of these sections should be hidden  or rolled up  when  you first go the product information screen  You can also set different sections to be hidden depending on  whether you are adding a product  editing a product or cloning a product     For instance  when adding a product you may decide that you need all the sections visible  in which case you  will un check all these boxes  When editing  however  you may not need the Advanced Pricing or Associated  Products section visible by default  in which case you would opt for them to be hidden to start with     Of course  when you are on a product information screen you can click the    show    and    hide    links to  dynamically display or hide different secti
87. ache facility in JShop Server this job will completely clear the cache    e Custom Script     You can also select custom scripts to run  If you select this option you can enter the path  to the script in the text box below  The path you enter should be from the main JShop Server directory     Active  Specifies if the job is active or not     Day Of Week   This setting says which day of the week the job should be run  You can specify a single day or choose    Any        if you want the job to run every single day  This option will override any    Day of Month    setting if you select  anything other than    Any          Day Of Month    Alternatively you can set a single day of the month that you would like a job to run  or again select    Any       for  any day     Hour    This is the hour of the day that you would like the job to run  Again  select    Any       to have a job run every  hour     Minute  This allows you to specify what minute of the hour you would like the job to run     48    General Settings   Automated Jobs    Note  Remember that jobs are triggered by visits to the front end store by customers so jobs may not    run at exactly the time you specify here  If a job is over due  the next time a customer loads a page on  your site the job will automatically run     49       49    General Settings   Image Settings 50    4 22 Image Settings    JShop Server includes the ability to set default images for various image fields  in addition to display  dimensions and  s
88. additional set will show an  orange    Set As Default    button which you can click to change the default templates used for your site  You can  also open your site in another template set  without setting it as the default  by clicking the red    View Site     button     Template sets designed for version 2 2 0 and above of JShop Server will also show an    Edit Options    button  which will provide access to the designer defined options available for the templates and for all template sets  where CSS files are found a select box and    Edit CSS File    button will be shown providing access to JShop  Server   s built in CSS editor     117    Templates   Installed Template Sets 118    Edit Options Edit Templates    css blue css   Tees       Location  templates defaultCopy  Author  Whorl Ltd   Home Page  http    www jshop co uk   Version  2 2    This is the standard  default template set for JShop Server  Options  on this template include the selection of different colour style sheets   logo upload and product display options  columns or rows       css blue css e Exes        Example of Installed Template Sets screen    8 5 Edit Options    For those template sets designed to work with the new template management system in JShop Server 2 2 0  a  blue    Edit Options    button will be displayed which  when clicked will display options specific to that template set   For instance  here is the options screen for the default JShop Server templates  As you can see this allows you  to
89. ain  this price will not change even it should do  Similar check  boxes appear for the Shipping Total and Discount Total  These are especially useful if you are editing an order  after your discount or shipping settings have changed as it enables you to keep the old calculation rather than  have the system calculate new  different  charges for you     In addition there is a checkbox for each line in the    Remove    column  Any checked lines will be deleted from the  order once    Update Order Lines    is clicked     Finally  if the    Zero Tax Charges    checkbox is checked when    Update Order Lines    is clicked all tax on the order  will be zeroed     On the main details screen the important buttons are the    Set Customer    and    Re calculate Tax  amp  Shipping     ones  With the    Set Customer    button the system will use the customer   s email address you have entered to  locate and load up their customer account  This will pre fill the billing address details and set tax etc   accordingly  If the customer does not have an account it will set the tax settings etc  to the default     With the    Re calculate Tax  amp  Shipping    buttons  updated customer billing and delivery address details are used    to re calculate the tax and shipping on an order  It is important that you use this option if you change the billing  or delivery address details to ensure that the correct shipping and tax is calculated as part of the order     194    Orders   Editing Orders 195    
90. aken     Credit card details are taken on eProcessingNetwork   s payment page     Settings Page Details    208    Payment Gateways   Gateways 209    Account Number   Username    This is the account number   username issued to you by eProcessingNetwork when you signed up for an  account with them     Background Color  This is the background color that will be used on the payment page     What Do I Need To Setup At eProcessingNetwork     You should not need to setup anything at eProcessingNetwork in order for transactions to be successfully  processed     17 4 10 goEmerchant    Server Requirements  There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with goEmerchant     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on the goEmerchant payment page on their site     Settings Page Details    goEmerchant Merchant Name  Your merchant name as issued by goEmerchant when you signed up for an account with them     What Do I Need To Setup At goEmerchant     You should not need to setup anything at goEmerchant in order for transactions to be successfully processed     17 4 11 Google Checkout    Server Requirements  An SSL certificate is required and CURL support with SSL needs to be available in PHP     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Payment details are taken on Google s own checkout pages     Settings Page Details    Mode  Select either the Google Checkout sandbox of live service    Merchant ID  Your Google Checkout merchant ID    Merchant Key  Your Go
91. an be setup in the Tax Shipping section     Activate Receipt  If YES is selected a link will appear against orders allowing a receipt to be printed  This receipt uses a  template called receipt html which is located in the usual template directory     Show CC Number In Groups Of 4 Numbers With Spaces  If you wish to show the credit card number on the order details screen grouped into 4 digit blocks then set this  to YES  alternatively set it to NO     4 18 Order Status Settings  With version 2 0 JShop Server provides customisable order status     This allows you to create your own order  status settings and also select what should happen when an order is given an available status     From the main status list you can add  edit and delete different statuses  However  there are a number of  default statuses that are special in JShop Server and these can be edited but cannot be deleted     mi Name  Special Status   Colour   Processing   Action    1 New TES m Deduct From Stock Eg  A Deduct From Stock   SES m P Clear Credit Card Details   Failed YES NjA Credit To Stock    E3  E3  Cancelled YES N A Credit To Stock Eg  Eq  E3               Part Dispatched YES NjA  Dispatched YES NJA  On Hold NO NjA    Invoice NO Ee    Total Number of Status Settings     9  OO   Oo  ol  em  Go    Order Status List    44    General Settings   Order Status Settings 45    4 18 1 Adding Editing Order Statuses    Adding and editing order statuses uses the same screen       Deduct from stock  if not alread
92. an enter a list of options   separated by commas  to load up these field options     If you wish to import directly into certain sections you can use either the sectionIDs field or the sectionNames  field to set the sections that the product appear in  sectionIDs should contain a list of internal section IDs   separated by commas  and sectionNames should contain a list of section titles  again separated by commas     9 4 5 New Products    This provides the ability to import new products into the JShop Server product database  We only recommend  using the product ID field if you are using the    Replace Insert    Insert Method  see below      For product extra fields that are select boxes  check boxes or radio buttons you can enter a list of options   separated by commas  to load up these field options     If you wish to import directly into certain sections you can use either the sectionIDs field or the sectionNames  field to set the sections that the product appear in  sectionIDs should contain a list of internal section IDs   separated by commas  and sectionNames should contain a list of section titles  again separated by commas     An extra box is available with this import entitled    Insert Method     There are three possible options     Straight Insert  JShop Server will attempt to import the products directly  without affecting any existing  products  If you are importing a product ID and that product ID already exists in the database  JShop Server  will not add the re
93. and sections specific to  a particular customer account type  This is useful for viewing the information that different customer accounts  will see     Account Type        se Show  Ftion   Insert New Sub Section E Sort   Reorder    S       Account Type Selector    The Sections Part Of The Screen    63    Contents   Sections Structure 64       SUB SECTIONS  ID   Title Short Description Visible   Sections Products Action  21 Abstract Impressions The modern world produces a lot of images that could be term    Y 0 9  20 People From camp fires in the Australian outback to gently lazing r    Y 0 13  22 Scenery We all love the world around us and what better way to celeb    Y 5 8  23 Space The final frontier  Space provides such majesty and awe that    Y 3 5  19 Wildlife Wildlife images capture the imagination like nothing else  I    Y   12  Total Number of Sections  5       The Sections Part Of The Screen    Here you see the sub sections for the current section  If you think of the current section as the parent  these  are that section   s children  The buttons at the top of this list do the following     Edit Section  This shows the section editing screen for the section you are viewing  For instance  when  Sections Structure first loads  clicking this button will edit the main section   s settings     Insert New Sub Section  This shows the section adding screen and when created the section will appear in  the list  making it a child of the currently viewed section     Sort   Reor
94. ank  and visa versa  You can supply both  in which case the recipient   s email software will decide  which to use     From  Reply To Email Address  This is the email address that will appear as the from address     103    Taxi Shipping   Supplier Pekde 104    6 13 Supplier Fields    This is where you setup fields for information you wish to store about suppliers in your system  There is a  basic set installed with JShop Server and all  apart from sup_company can be deleted  Feel free to add fields  for any information you wish to keep about a supplier  In addition any of these fields can be used in the emails  to suppliers     There are 4 field types available  as detailed below     Single line entry field    TEXTAREA Multiple row entry field  SELECT A select box of options  CHECKBOX Single check box    Each of the fields can be validated and validation messages displayed if they are not filled in        List Of Supplier Fields    sup_company Company Name TEXT    sup_sdfsadf  asdfafds TEXT Eg Delete    Total Fields   Sort   Reorder Fields       List of Supplier Fields    The list of supplier fields gives you an overall view of the fields for suppliers  their internal and viewable titles  along with an    Edit    button and a    Delete    button     At the bottom of this screen there is also an    Add New Field    button along with a select box for the type of field  you would like to add     104    Taxi Shipping   Supplier Pekde 105    6 13 1 Adding Editing Supplier Fields  
95. ank to only scale by one dimension     Resize Images At Upload   O yo    yES IF JPG  use this quality setting    75  default       Language  Spanish    Tt Cs    Language  Outlandish    G SS       Update Field    Editing an IMAGE extra field    Default Image      This allows you to select a default image that will be shown on a product page if no product specific image has  been uploaded for this field via the product editing screen  You can either upload an image from your local  computer here or pick one that   s already been uploaded     Image Display Dimensions   This specifies how you want the image displayed on the screen  If you only provide one of the options then the  image will be constrained to that size and the other dimension will scale to fit  For example setting    x    to 300  and    y    to 0 will lead to the image always being shown 300 pixels wide but will allow the height to change  accordingly  so the image always stays in relative scale     Resize Images At Upload   If you have GD enabled on your PHP installation you can use this option to have images uploaded for this field  automatically resized to the dimensions entered in the option above  This means that the version that   s stored  on the server will be the correct dimensions already  In addition you can get a quality setting that will be used  if the uploaded image is a JPG file     32    General Settings   Extra Section Fields 33    4 9 Extra Section Fields    In much the same way as for products 
96. another site     Is Section Visible   Setting this to NO will automatically make the section inaccessible from your store     Available To Customer Types   This selection allows you to select which customer account types can view this section     if a customer s  account type doesn   t match this list then the section will not be displayed for them  In this way you can create  sections only visible to certain customer types  Selecting    All    makes the section available to all account types   You may also select multiple account types by using the Shift and CTRL keys on your keyboard     Parent Section    This allows you to quickly set where you would like this section to appear  By changing this setting you can  move sections  and any of their sub sections  to different parts of your shop  Click the    Pick Parent Section    to  launch a pop up allowing you to drill down the current section structure and select the new parent for this  section     Template For Section Page    67    Contents   Adding  Editing Sections 68    Sections are not limited to a single template page  You can setup more than one template for sections and  have different sections use different templates  Here you can select the template that the section should use      the default is section html    Exclude From Sitema  If you do not wish this section to appear in the sitemap select NO here  otherwise select YES              Extra Fields Part Of The Section Editing Screen    This section is where your
97. anque Populaire system   otherwise an error will be generated when attempting to checkout     Name of Merchant s Server  Purely informational    Merchant s Name  Purely informational    Merchant   s Email Address  Used to generate a confirmation email of the order information from the system    Automatic Redirection Timer    Number of seconds before the completion page at Banque Populaire automatically sends the customer back to  your site     What Do I Need To Setup At Banque Populaire     There is nothing you need to setup on your gateway   s administration pages     17 4 4 Barclays ePDQ    Server Requirements  There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with Barclays ePDQ     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on Barclays ePDQ payment page     204    Payment Gateways   Gateways 205    Settings Page Details    Client ID  lt currency gt     For each currency you are allowing people to check out in you will need to enter the corresponding client ID in  the appropriate box     Note  It is important that you set ISO numbers for your currencies in General   gt  Currency Settings in    order for the ePDQ integration to work correctly        Charge Type  Here you can choose between a Full Authorisation or Pre Authorisation  With Pre Authorisation you will need to  login to your Barclays ePDQ administration system in order to release the funds when ready     Passphrase  Passphrase that corresponds to the passphrase you have entered in
98. are taken on SecureTrading   s payment page     Settings Page Details    Merchant ID  This is the account number issued to you by SecureTrading when you signed up for an account with them     Email Customer Confirmation  Set to YES if you would like SecureTrading to email a confirmation to the customer as well as JShop Server     Merchant Email Address  Enter the email address that you would like confirmations from SecureTrading to arrive     What Do I Need To Setup At SecureTrading     In order for JShop Server to receive payment status notifications you need to edit and upload some files to  your SecureTrading administration system  When you installed JShop Server a sub directory was created in  the main gateways directory called    resources     Within this is a directory called    SecureTrading     The following  files are in there     callback txt    callback f txt  form html    225    Payment Gateways   Gateways 226    Editing callback txt and callback f txt    Open both of these files in a text editor  The contents of both are exactly the same  like this           methodl POST   urll http   www  yourdomain com gateways response securetrading php  fields1l orderref  streference  stauthcode  stresult  rnd   pipel yes    You need to edit the url1 line in both and change the URL to the url where gateways response securetrading   php can be found on your server  All three files  including form html  then need to be uploaded to your  SecureTrading account     17 4 27 Skipjac
99. article should use     the  default is article  html       5 16 2 1 Extra Fields             ia Upload     Pick or URL       a Remove Image             Extra Text            Extra Fields Part Of The Article Editing Screen    This section is where your extra article fields will appear  see the    General    section of the documentation for  more information on setting up extra article fields      88    Contents   Articles 89    1  Extra product fields of type TEXT will be shown as a single text line field    2  Extra product fields of type TEXTAREA will be shown as a multiple text line field into with HTML can also be  added    3  Extra product fields of type IMAGE will be shown in the same way as the normal Thumbnail and Image  fields  Images are stored in products extras however     5 16 2 2 Additional Options    Manual Sorting    artide html A       no    ves  01 Le Hoi  e   2010  e  Time   01 Le H op          NO YES  The Additional Options Part of the Article Editing Screen          Sub Article Sort Order  Here you can specify how you want sub articles for this article sorted  The options available are     Manual Sorting   you handle the sorting manually using the  Sort Reorder  facility on the article browser  Created  Newest First    Created  Oldest First    Alphabetical  A Z    Alphabetical  Z A    ID  Highest First    when an article is added it is given a unique sequential ID  this sorts using that   ID  Lowest First    when an article is added it is given a unique se
100. as a  parent in the section structure     131    Import Export   Importing 132    9 4 12 Associated    This import provides a quick way for you to assign associated products in your store  The file you import is a  set format  although within that you can use either productIDs or product codes to do the linking and field  separators can be specified  It also provides a way for you to specify bi directional associations and the  positioning of each associated product against their relative products  More information is available on the  import screen itself     9 5 Exporting    When on an export screen the left hand select box shows a list of all the possible fields that JShop Server will  export and the right hand screen shows those fields you have selected to export and the order in which they  will be exported     Saving The Exported File            Output Method  Select Output Method    Server File Name   Save To Server only        Download File In Browser v  E evelopment web JSS system admin                  Selecting How To Export The Data    JShop Server provides you with three different options when exporting     Download File In Browser    This will cause a file download box to pop up and allow you to save the file to your local computer  Please note  that some browsers do not support this method and you will not be able to use this to export information     Output To Screen  Save With    View Source        This will output the export to the screen and you can then sa
101. atically notified  Please note that UseCash can  only currently accept payments in Euros     Settings Page Details    Vendor Username    227    Payment Gateways   Gateways 228  Username provided to you by UseCash    Secret Key  This is the secret key you have set against your account at UseCash    What Do I Need To Setup At UseCash     You will need to setup the following options in your UseCash Admin     Callback URL   see the JShop Server settings page for the gateway for the URL     17 4 30 Verisign  17 4 30 1 Verisign Payflow Link USA    Server Requirements  There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with Verisign Link     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on Verisign payment page     Settings Page Details    Login ID  This is your Verisign Login ID     Partner  This is your Verisign Partner name     Transaction Type  Choose between one of the available options for transaction type     Sale  Authorisation  Delayed Capture     Description  The company name you wish to display on the Verisign payment page     What Do I Need To Setup At Verisign     On the details page for Verisign Payflow Link USA in JShop Server you will be given details that you need to  enter into your Verisign administration  These are entered into the Account Info   gt  Payflow Link Info section of  the Verisign Administration  They are as follows     Return URL Method  POST   Return URL   see the JShop Server settings page for the gateway for the URL  
102. ave a base price as well   Here you would normally put a standard packaging and handling charge  if applicable      Available To Customer Type   Here you can choose the customer account type that this shipping type is available for     All    means that it is  applicable to all customer account types  If a customer checks out and does not have a customer account type  that matches the selection here  this shipping type will not be shown as an option     Weight Limits     A common problem with shipping is that some methods companies can only ship using certain methods if the  weight is below a given weight  These options allow you to hide shipping types from customer selection on the  checkout if the total basket weight is above or below what s entered here  Entering 0 de activates a weight  threshold     Goods Totals Limits    As with the weight limits these options allow you to hide a shipping type from being visible to a customer if  goods total limits fall outside the thresholds entered  Entering 0 de activates these thresholds     Shipping Value Taxable  If you have set shipping to be taxable in your store you can override this for each shipping type by setting this  option to NO     6 9 2 Shipping Rates    On the shipping types list screen there is a green    Rates    button next to each of the shipping types that you  setup  Clicking this brings up the shipping rates page for that shipping type     The main shipping rates page shows the currently entered shipping rates 
103. canonical  links for products     New Product  Select YES if you would like the product marked as a new product     Top Product  Select YES if you would like the product marked as a top product     On Special Offer   Select YES if you would like the product to be marked as on special offer     Is Product Visible     Selecting NO here will hide the product from your store  You can instantly make it visible again by selecting  YES     If invisible still allow product to be shown with direct link    81    Contents   Adding  Editing Products 82    If a product is set to be invisible and this option is set to YES  the product can still be accessed via  with a  direct link  It will not appear in any sections or through the search  however  This is useful if you wish to setup  a special offer product only for certain advertising as the product can only be found by going to it directly     Available To Customer Types   This field allows you to select which customer account types can view this product     if a customer   s account  type doesn   t match this list then the product will not be displayed for them  In this way you can create products  only visible to certain customer types  Selecting    All    makes the product available to all account types  You may  also select multiple account types by using the Shift and CTRL keys on your keyboard     Product Hags   Any addition product flags you have setup in your store using the    Product Flags    option available in the  Contents s
104. careful when setting up your exports and importing into  Quickbooks  testing with a dummy company if possible to make sure it   s working correctly for you     9 6 1 Quickbooks Settings    These options cover a few global settings for your store and should be used with caution                 International Version  Order Prefix  leave blank for no prefix         United Kingdom   ze    ebsite  Retail  Internet  T ax          Transaction Class    Tax Class  US Only            Declare Products Ae Inventory Items  Asset Account  Cost OF Goods Account       Ono    ves  Cost of Goods Sold          Product Income Account             Shipping Income Account  Gift Certificate Income Account  Discount Account         The Quickbooks Settings Screen    International Version    It is important that you select the correct international version of Quickbooks that you re using here as the  export formats are different depending on the version you use     Order Prefix    If you would like to prefix all the order numbers from JShop Server with a certain string to help identify them  once in Quickbooks  enter that string here  If you leave it blank no prefix will be added     Transaction Class  This is the INC account that you want to use for the transaction    Tax Class  US Only     This is only used for the US version of Quickbooks and specifies the INC account for the tax component of  orders    Declare Products As Inventory Items  If set to YES  the export will add extra lines to define the
105. ccount  Enter the email address of your PayPal account here     Description  This is the description of the order that will appear on the PayPal payment page     Logo SS ee  This lets you specify a logo to appear on the PayPal payment page  However  this needs to be from a secure  server otherwise a security notice will be shown to the customer on the PayPal payment page     Live  Testing Server  Here you can specify whether you wish to use the live Paypal checkout or  for integration testing  the Paypal  Sandbox     What Do I Need To Setup At PayPal     To receive payment notifications  assuming you have CURL with SSL support installed  you will need to go into  your PayPal account and activate the    Instant Payment Notification    feature that   s available  All you have to do  is turn this on  JShop Server will send the correct notification URL to PayPal     215    Payment Gateways   Gateways 216    17 4 18 2 Paypal Express    Server Requirements   An SSL certificate is required and cURL support with SSL needs to be available in PHP  Paypal has strict rules  on the positioning of their logos and checkout buttons on your website  Please see the following document for  more information     Express Checkout Button Placement and Usage    Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Payment details are taken on Paypal s own payment pages     Settings Page Details    Username  This is your Paypal Express API username  please note that this is not your Paypal email address     Password
106. ccount  to be able to add  reviews to products  This section provides some basic options for the review system within JShop Server     Enable Customer Reviews     Moderate Customer Reviews  O NO    YES    Update Settings       Review Settings    Each user can only review a product once     the system does not allow multiple reviews for the same product  from the same customer     Enable Customer Reviews     If set to YES  customer reviews will be activated and customers will be able to add reviews  including a rating   to products in your store     Moderate Customer Reviews     If set to YES a customer review will not automatically appear in your store until it has been set to visible in the  administration system  this is done in the Customers section   It would normally be advisable to activate this  option to avoid any unwanted reviews or spam being available on your site     4 30 Recent View Settings    Your store has a feature that allows customers to quickly and easily look over a list of products and sections  that they have viewed in your store  This screen allows you to turn this feature on or off and to set some  options     59    General Settings   Recent View Settings 60    Activate Recently Viewed Feature    Product History To Store    Section History To Store    Update Settings       Recent View Settings    Activate Recently Viewed Feature    When set to YES JShop Server will store product and section history for customers  allowing them to easily  skip back to 
107. cing      78    Contents   Adding  Editing Products 79  combination types  They are as follows     Qty Discounts    This enables you to setup quantity discounts on the product  The discounts can take the form of a flat rate  discount or a percentage discount  In addition the quantity discounts can be made available only to certain  customer types     There is also an option at the bottom of this section called    Quantities for the product with different options  should be combined for any quantity discounts above     You should set this to YES if you would like all selections  of a product with options to count towards the quantity discount  For instance  if the customer orders the same  product in red and blue  their quantities will be combined when calculating the quantity discount     Base Pricing Combinations    If pricing of individual options in the Extra Fields block isn   t sufficient to capture how you need to charge for an  item the Base Price Combinations enables you to change the actual base price of a product  set in the General  Details block  based on combinations of selected options  For instance  if all had a size and colour extra field  and all colours in all sizes were the same price apart from the Small  Black one and the Large  Blue one  you  could enter a base pricing combination here that changes the price of the product if either of those  combinations are selected  With base pricing combinations if you select to use a flat price  this will become the
108. cord to the database    Replace Insert  JShop Server will import the records  updating any products that already exist with the  new information and creating new records for those that don   t exist  The decision to update or replace is  made by checking to see if the product ID already exists  Be warned  if a product ID does already exist the  record will first be deleted before the new data with the same product ID is inserted     this could cause data  loss    Drop All Products Then Insert  As the name suggests this will drop every product in the database then  insert the products from the CSV file  Use this option with caution     9 4 6 Update Qty Discounts    This import screen provides you with the ability to import different quantity discounts for already existing  products in the system  Your import file should use either the productID field or the product code  code  field to  link to ensure that the information is linked correctly to the product record     For the accTypelD field you will also need to use the correct account Type ID  which is a number  You can use  0 for    All Accounts        NOTE  Importing quantity discounts for a product will cause already existing quantity discounts for that  product to be removed before the import  Only products that exist in the import file will be affected  other    products will remain unchanged        9 4 7 Update Base Pricing Combinations    This import screen provides you with the ability to import different base pricing
109. d to on the contact form page     Validation  Validate For and Validation Message   If you want to make it a requirement that a field is filled in you should select YES for the Validation radio  button  In addition  with the Validate For option  you can select how you want the field validated  There are a  number of built in validation types  such as Not Blank or Email Address and  in addition  choosing    Custom  Regex     allows you to enter a Perl style regular expression for the validation  permitting complex validation  routines to be used  If you are not sure how to use regular expressions or wish to find some for your particular  need a good site is http   regexlib com  where you will find many that you can enter here     Finally the Validation Message is the error message you wish to display if the validation or the field fails and  requires the user to re input information     NOTE  The regular expression validation uses Perl style regular expressions  This has changed in version       2 3 0 from POSIX due to the depreciation of the ereg group of functions in PHP    Visible  Setting this to NO will make a field invisible on the contact form     Content  only available for SELECT type fields     This allows you to enter a list of options for a select box field  You can enter a new option by typing it in the  Option  box and either pressing return or clicking the    Add    button     If you select an already entered option its contents will appear in the Option  box al
110. der  This shows the reordering screen that allows you to move the sub sections up and down to  change their display order     Once you have created some sub sections via  the    Insert New Sub Section    button you will see them appearing  on the section list  Clicking on the title of one of these will transfer you to the section structure for that section   Now the page shows you sub sections that appear on that section and products that appear on the section as  well     To help you navigate the section structure the top title bar contains the full path to the current section you are  viewing and you can click on any of the previous section   s titles to go back to that level     Each sub section listed has an    Edit    button that will launch the edit screen for that section and a    Delete    button  if you wish to remove the section     The Products Part Of The Screen    Code  Action    Icy Mounts   Juicy Plants   Lake At Sunset  Mountains In The Sun  Quantity Test   Shirt   Twilight Cactus  Volcanic Aftermaths    Total Number of Products     Search For Products To Add iere   EA    The Products Part Of The Screen       The products part of the screen shows the products that will appear in this section  The buttons at the top of  this list do the following     64    Contents   Sections Structure 65    Insert New Product Here  This shows the product adding screen and once added the product will  automatically be added to the currently viewed section     Sort  Reorder  Thi
111. directly  this step will not be skipped  even if you only have one payent option  Only applicable to multi step checkout     Update       Checkout Settings    Allow One Step Checkout   Select YES if you would like to use the one step checkout facility that was added in version 2 3 0  Only  customers with Javascript enabled will be able to use the one step checkout  other customers will be taken  through the normal multi step checkout     Show Summary Before Order Submit  One Step Checkout     Select YES if you would like the customer to view the normal order summary screen before actually submitting  the order to you with the one step checkout     Force Customer Account Creation    With this option set to YES  visitors to your store will not be able to checkout unless they already have an  account or unless they open an account  The option to checkout without an account will be removed     Minimum Order Value  Base Currency     A setting above 0 activates this option  This allows you to set a minimum goods total value  excluding tax  that  the customer must have in their basket before they are allowed to check out     Skip Payment Option Step If Only One Payment Type Available    If you are only taking credit cards on your store through a payment gateway that the customer is transferred  to  or via  other options excluding gift certificates and offer codes you can select YES here to skip the payment  option step at checkout  taking the customer directly onto the order summary
112. down to select a specific order status or  choose    Any Status    to output all orders within the range     Saving The Exported File              Download File In Browser v  2   Development web JSS system admin      Export Now       Select Output Method    Server File Name   Save To Server only        135    Import Export   Quickbooks Menu 136  Selecting How To Export The Data  JShop Server provides you with three different options when exporting     Download File In Browser    This will cause a file download box to pop up and allow you to save the file to your local computer  Please note  that some browsers do not support this method and you will not be able to use this to export information     Output To Screen  Save With    View Source        This will output the export to the screen and you can then save it to your local machine by using the View  Source option in your web browser     Save To Server    This lets you save the export directly to your web server in the location specified by the    Server File Name     field  It is important that you enter a valid path and file name and that the directly you are exporting to has the  correct permissions to allow PHP to create a file  In addition please note that it is advisable to export to a  password protected directory to disallow people getting access to the files via  the web  For extra security  choose a path that is outside of the web root     136    Newsletter   137    The Newsletter sub system in JShop Server provid
113. ds to the  appropriate product     Note  This will only update the basic stock level settings for products and not any combination stock levels  that you have setup  Also  updating stock levels should not be done whilst orders are being processed on    the system as importing new stock levels will set the stock level absolutely and this may lead to  discrepancies afterwards        9 4 3 Update Main Prices    This is an import screen and provides the ability to import a list of product IDs and   or product codes along  with corresponding main prices  Without either a product ID or product code field being included in the import  CSV  products will not be updated as there will be no way of cross referencing import records to the  appropriate product     Note  Only those currencies that are not calculated by exchange rates can have their prices updated by    this import  Currencies calculated by exchange rates will not appear in the left hand box        9 4 4 Update Existing Products    This is an import screen and provides the ability to import a list of product IDs and   or other product  information to update existing product information in your store  Without either a product ID or product code  field being included in the import CSV  products will not be updated as there will be no way of cross   referencing import records to the appropriate product     129    Import Export   Importing 130    For product extra fields that are select boxes  check boxes or radio buttons you c
114. due to  configuration settings in PHP limiting the size of uploaded files     Load From Server    Here you can enter a path and file name to a backup file located on your server  This is the best option for  larger restores     Once you have picked your backup file  click Restore Data and the process will begin     Note  As soon as the restore begins all tables currently in the JShop Server database will be dropped and  you will not be able to retrieve them  Please be certain that you wish to restore your data  It is advisable    to only make the Backup Restore section available to the administrator account to avoid any accidental  use  Once the restore has finished you will also be logged out should you try to continue accessing the  admin system and will have to login again        16 3 Other Methods for Backup and Restore    As discussed in the Installation manual  if you are comfortable with mySQL we suggest installing phpMyAdmin  on your server  With phpMyAdmin you are able to backup your whole database  or just certain tables from it   export these to files and load them in again     Many users may find the flexibility that phpMyAdmin can offer more suitable for their needs  Please note that  although we cannot give support directly on using phpMyAdmin we can help in its use with JShop Server     200    Payment Gateways   201    This section describes the payment gateways that JShop Server supports  Some of these payment gateways  require extra setup  normally in your pa
115. e    Top Level Domain    report  However  if you are finding  that your store is slow with this option turned on this means that the DNS server your site is using is slow to  respond and so  to improve performance  you should set this feature to NO     Ignore Referrers From Reports    This option is used to filter out any internal referrals from one page to another  For instance if your site   s  domain is www yourdomain com  you should put www yourdomain com in this field  otherwise the Referrer  report would include your site   s internal links  rendering the report useless     Ignore IPs From Logs  This is useful if you wish to disable logging from set IP addresses  for instance the IP addresses you and your  employees use to access the Internet  By doing this your own hits will not appear in the logs     History To Keep When Pruning    If you have an automated job  or jobs  active for pruning the logs the setting here will dictate the history in  days that log information will be kept  Logging can generate a lot of information and it   s important to keep on    108    Logs   General Options 109    top of this in order to stop the database growing to an unmanageable size     7 2 Logs Summary    This screen simply gives you an overview of data in the log database  It tells you the total number of page hits  registered  the range of dates the hits cover  the total number of days the logs cover and the average number  of hits per day     Total Hits In Database   5046  Earlies
116. e  customer sees throughout the store will be the price excluding this discount  This is useful if you have  wholesale customers  for instance  that receive a standard percentage discount off normal product prices     Allow Separate Delivery Address   If you are allowing deperate Delivery Addresses in Customers   gt  General Settings you can still disable this  ability per account type by using this option  If you wish customers with an account type to be able to select a  separate delivery address select YES here  otherwise select NO     11 3 Account Assign Rules  Account assign rules within JShop Server allow you to automatically set or adjust a customer s given account  type depending on the information they enter whilst either creating their account or editing their account     However  in addition to setting their customer account type you can also set their tax exempt status  This  would allow you  for instance  to setup an extra customer field and use a regular expression to validate any  VAT number or your own customer account reference numbers     The main list gives an overview of the rules you have setup  indicating what account type they re setting the  customer to and whether they re setting the tax exempt flag against their customer account type     Name   Assign Account Type  Set Tax Exempt Action         My Test 2 Set Default  No Change Y Eq  Test Wholesale R Eg Del         Total Number of Account Assign Rules  2  Sort   Reorder Rules Order       List of Accou
117. e Number TEXT          fax Fax Number TEXT  e_Retailer Retailer CHECKBOX E EEEE  e_testfield Test Field TEXT ED ES    Total Fields  14  Sort   Reorder Fields       List of Customer Fields    The list of customer fields gives you an overall view of the fields for customers  their internal and viewable    147    Customers   Customer Fields 148    titles along with an    Edit    button and  if the field isn   t one of the standard JShop Server customer fields  a     Delete    button     At the bottom of this screen there is also an    Add New Field    button along with a select box for the type of field  you would like to add     11 4 1 Adding Editing Customer Fields    Adding and editing customer fields uses the same screen  However  some of the options are only available for  certain types of fields  Options available are as follows     TEXT  company    Company Name   Maximum Length   Validation Ono    yes   Validate For Ho  r  Validation Message    visible Ono    ves    Language  Spanish  Title                  Validation Message       Editing an existing TEXT type field    Name    This is an internal name that is used in the database  It must be unique and you will be told if it is not  This  field is not generally shown to the customer     Title  This is the description of the field that is shown to the customer in the default templates     Size and Maximum Length  only for TEXT type fields     Size is the actual size of the form field on the page and maximum length is the 
118. e a new layout or save a loaded layout with a new  name  the original will still exist as well      Update Product Images Stored Import Layouts  Thumbnail Import v    Ao L Cid    Loaded Layout  Thumbnail Import          Inclusion Of The    Save    Button    These routines make it easy to retrieve a layout that you use often  for instance you can save a layout for  exporting orders and each time you export orders you can re load this layout to make sure that the CSV file  that is created is outputted in the same way     9 2 The Main Fields Boxes    For both importing and exporting fields can be selected in left hand box and clicking on the arrow will transfer  them to the right hand box  On the far right of the two boxes the up and down arrows will move fields up and  down the field order and the red X will remove them altogether from the right hand box     127    Import Export   The Main Fields Boxes 128    Import Customers Fields    Available Fields  Import File Fields   SKIP_FIELD  customerlD  Email  Password  Account Type ID  Tax Exempt  company  title  forename       surname    address   address2  town  county  country  postcode      00    e_testhield  e Retailer       Main Fields Boxes  This one is for updating image locations     9 3 Additional Import Export Information    Each of the import   export screens also has the same section near the bottom of the page     Additional Import   or Export  Information  These fields describe the actual format of the CSV file to be 
119. e attribute is and the following are permitted values     W   Weight   C   Product Code   S   Stock Level   q   Minimum Quantity  Q   Maximum Quantity  E   Exclude   U   Supplier Code    For Stock Levels  S  you can also set the Exclude flag to Y or N according to whether you want the option  excluded from purchase if it goes out of stock     NOTE  Importing attribute combinations for a product will cause already existing attribute combinations    for that product to be removed before the import  Only products that exist in the import file will be  affected  other products will remain unchanged        9 4 9 Mailing List    This is an import screen and provides the ability to import a list of email addresses to the JShop Server  newsletter distribution list     9 4 10 Customers    This is an import screen and provides the ability to import customers into your database  Important fields are  as follows     e Password   this should be the pain text password  It will be encrypted by the system on import   e Account Type ID   this is the internal accTypeID for the customer  The default account type is 1     e Email     Ideally you should ensure that all records have an email address against them  otherwise the  account cannot be used by the customer on the site     9 4 11 Sections  This provides a way of importing sections into your store  Important fields are as follows     e parentID     this is the internal  Jshop Server  ID number for the section that this section should have 
120. e effect when changed until the next time you login to JShop       Server     12    User Management   13    JShop Server has built in user management for the administration system  with customisable permission  groups  that enable you to setup an unlimited number of administration user accounts  each with different  access permissions for which parts of the administration system they can use  In addition to this  JShop  Server   s user management features include the ability to log all actions and log successful and failed login  attempts     The basic structure of the administration accounts system consists of user groups and user accounts  A user  account can only be used by one person at any given time and each user can be a member of multiple user  groups for access permissions     3 1 The Administrator Account    A default account is setup when JShop Server is installed  with username administrator  at installation this  account also has a password of administrator   This is the main administration account for your system and  this account cannot be deleted although you can alter the username and password  With this main  administration account you can still enter and use the JShop Server administration system as normal whilst  locking out all other user accounts or setting them to safe mode  see below   This is useful if you need to do  updates to the system that require no other activity to be going on     Note  For security reasons you should immediately change the ad
121. e hop    21    General Settings   Global Options 22    Server to issue a 301 redirect should the spider visit using a URL that doesn   t match the selected format   providing them with the correct format  This won t affect normal visitors to the store     Response Code To Send Spiders for Invalid  Unavailable Products or Sections   By default JShop Server will send a normal 302 redirect to the home page if a spider arrives at a product or  section that either no longer exists in your store or has been made invisible  Here you can change the response  that you would like sent     Server Time Settings    Select Store Time Zone   This option lets you select the time zone you d like to use for your store  For instance  in the United Kingdom  you d choose GMT  This option is useful if you host in a different country to where you operate as the chances  are that the server time zone will not match your time zone  Setting this option ensures that everything is kept  in your local time zone     Is DST In Effect     Change this option to set whether Daylight Saving Time  DST  is currently in effect or not in your time zone   The system will then automatically alter its time settings accordingly     4 3 Cart Sessions  amp  Security Settings    This settings page provides complete control over how JShop Server handles cart sessions and the security  associated with them  It is worth taking some time to familiarise yourself with these options and to change  them to suit your particular s
122. e pulled out and displayed to suit     Abstract  A 250 character short abstract for the article     Content  An unlimited text field for the full article content     META Description  A specific Meta Tag description field for this article     META Keywords  A specific Meta Tag keywords field for this article     Is Article Visible   Setting this to NO will automatically make the article inaccessible from your store     Available To Customer Types   This selection allows you to select which customer account types can view this article     if a customer   s account  type doesn   t match this list then the article will not be displayed for them  In this way you can create articles  only visible to certain customer types  Selecting    All    makes the article available to all account types  You may  also select multiple account types by using the Shift and CTRL keys on your keyboard     Parent Article    This allows you to quickly set where you would like this article to appear  By changing this setting you can  move articles  and any of their sub articles  to different parts of your article structure  Click the    Pick Parent  Article to launch a pop up allowing you to drill down the current article structure and select the new parent for  this article     Template For Article Page   Articles are not limited to a single template page  You can setup more than one template for articles and have  different articles use different templates  Here you can select the template that the 
123. e turned on   for security reasons  even if you didn   t want to log all actions performed in the system     Disable User Logins   If set to YES this will instantly disable all user accounts  denying them access to the system     Number User Actions Per Page  This is a configuration option for the viewing of action log files  It simply sets how many actions should be  shown per page when viewing the log files     Check IP Address    With this option enabled when a user logs in to the administration system their IP address is stored  With each  page load within the administration system this stored IP address is checked against the user   s current IP  address  If the two differ the user is forcibly logged out and taken back to the login page  This is a security  feature to stop access to the administration system from different IP addresses with the same login details  If  your users are on dial up connections you should be aware that if they have to re connect to the internet  their  IP address will change and they will be logged out and need to login again     Timeout Login With No Action After   This allows you to set a time limit after which  if no page has been visited in the administration system the  user will automatically be logged out  This is a security feature to prevent user login sessions staying active if  the user forgot to Logout  Setting the time limit to 0 will de activate this option     Block Unsuccessful Logins   This options provides some protection fro
124. ection of the administration system will appear here with YES   NO radio buttons in the same way as  the special offer etc  flags        5 8 8 Associated Products    mma OOS S NUSS    Currently Associated     ABS1   Fitered Freworks UPDATE   lt   gt    ABS2   Waves Of Emotion UPDATE   lt   gt      Filtered Fireworks UPDATE  Waves Of Emotion UPDATE      00           V  create 2 way links for new selections       Associated Products Block  A search has been performed for products here    JShop Server allows you to associate a product with other products within your store to enable cross selling   This section provides the means to select other products to link to the one you are adding or editing     The top box on the left is where you can enter a search string to find products  Clicking the    Search    button will  load the search results into the larger box on the left  Once you have performed a search clicking on the  product code or product name will add the product to the list on the right  which is the full list of products that  will be displayed on this product   s product page     Additionally you can alter the display order of the associated products by selecting a product in the right hand  window and using the up and down arrows to move it up and down the list  Finally the red X will remove a  product from the list     There is one other option available here     Create 2 way links for new selections  This enables you not only to  show the selected product on this
125. ections for Root Section _   _  gt   gt _ gt   This option allows you to create sub section lists for the main root sections on the front end of your store  The  default templates have this ability if this option is set to YES but only include the code to show up to two levels   the main level and the level below   However  you can includes how many levels you want retrieved and  update the templates accordingly to show this number of levels  If you increase the number of levels you are  retrieving you should consider caching rootsections as the number of queries radically increases for each level  you add     4 27 Search Settings    JShop Server includes a comprehensive search facility for your store that will not only search products but also  sections  In addition  search results can be sorted by a number of fields and also returned based upon price  ranges     56    General Settings   Search Settings 57       Product Code  Product Name   Short Description  Full Description  Product Keywords  Meta Description Tag  Meta Keywords Tag  Photographer  PackQuantity  PackUnit                                                                      Updating the Search Settings    The options in this section allow you to tailor the search function in your store     Number Products Per Page  This sets the maximum number of products shown on the search results page before Previous and Next  buttons are needed     Product Fields To Search On  This option allows you to set which product fi
126. ed etc   please select NO on  this option  otherwise select YES  Many of the subsequent options on this page will have no effect if  Dispatching is turned off     Dispatch Button on Orders Screen  When set to YES this will show a dedicated Dispatch button for each order on the orders screen  Regardless of    43    General Settings   Order Admin Settings 44    the setting here  the actions drop down against orders will show the dispatch option as will the drop down at  the top of the screen for processing multiple orders in one go     Allow Partial Dispatches   If YES is selected  when dispatching an order an intermediate screen will show allowing you to select which  order lines and how many of each order line have been dispatched  Outstanding quantities will be left on the  order and the order will be marked as PART DISPATCHED  This allows you to operate back ordering     Email Customer on Dispatch  Setting this option to YES will automatically send a dispatch notification email to the customer  This email can  be configured in Templates     Send Copy of Dispatch Email  If set to YES  a copy of the dispatch email will be sent to the email address entered in the Email Address field     Activate Dispatch Tracking   If you wish to include dispatch tracking information in the email to the customer then set this option to YES   When dispatching you will be able to enter dispatch information including a dispatch reference and courier  name and contact details  A list of Couriers c
127. ed to upper case when  saved for consistency  many payment gateways expect the currency code to be in upper case      Some examples of currency codes are     GBP   British Pounds   EUR   Euros   USD   United States Dollars  AUD   Australian Dollars  CAN   Canadian Dollars     A complete list of currency codes can be found here  htto   www oanda com site help iso_code shtml    ISO Number    This is the 3 digit ISO Number for the currency and will only need to be used if your selected payment gateway  requires it  e g  Barclays ePDQ and Velocity Pay require this  Your payment gateway   s manual will give you the  correct numbers  e g  826   GBP and 840   USD     27    General Settings   Currency Settings 28    Name    This is your descriptive name for the currency  Usually you would use this to display the currency selection on  your site  the default templates use this      Decimal Places    Enter the number of decimal places you would like to display the currency in  More often than not  currencies  use 2 decimals places     Pre Text  Middle Text and Post Text    This defines the actual formatting of the currency when shown in JShop Server  For instance if you were  setting up GBP and you wanted the currency to display like this    10 99 you values you would use are as  follows     Pre Text     Middle Text  Post Text    As you can see by setting these three options you can completely configure how the currency is to be    displayed     Note  The currency symbol for the Euro  
128. ee esse eee iinoa ra annahar ane eniU NOn KERAN EU NARE EEEE Ne eee 159   12 3 1 Adding Editing Payment Options        ssssssssssnununannnnununnnnunannnnnnunnnnunununnnnannnnununnnnnnannnnanannnnannnnn nanan 160  Credit Card Fields   estkkREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEREKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEEERKREEEERRKREEEEKEKREEEERRE 161   12 4 1 Editing Credit Card Fields       ssssssssnnnnununnnnunnnnnnunannnnnnunnnnunannnnunannnnununnnnanannnnanannnnnnannnnanannnnanannn nanan 162  Gift Certificate Settings iissireirsssarsennsunieaniununn innana nakana anian aeina KAUNAN EAEE AUNE EKRENE 163  Gift Certificate Pele  vxeeEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEKKKKEEEEKKKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEEERKREEEERRKREEEEEEKREEEERRE 164  Create Edit Gift Certificates        ssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 165  Search Gift Certificates      s sssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 167  Automatic DISCOUNES orsina enaena iaaa RAE NKE AAE EE aE 168   12 9 1 Adding Editing Automatic DISCOUNTS  sssssssssssasnnnununnnnunannnnnnunnnnanununnananunnununnnnunannnnanannnnanannnnan an 168  Offer Code SettingS uk eEEERRKREEEERKKREEEERKKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRE 173  List Of Offer CodeS     ctccceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee eeeeaeeeeeneaaeeeeaeae eee EDA enaa NAAN NAAKKA Anaa 173   12 11 1 Adding Editing Offer Codes          vsrsrsesEESEEEREEREEREEREEREEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEREEREEEEEEEEEEEEn 
129. either for authorising a transaction or receiving a response regarding  payment status  For example  USA ePAY requires a secure server socket connection to actually authorise a  payment and PayPal requires a secure server socket connection for the merchant s web site to receive a  notification of payment status     For these instances JShop Server uses a PHP extension called CURL  Further cURL needs to be compiled with  SSL support  This is available as standard on many servers and you may already have it installed and if you  have any doubt you should contact your hosting company or system administrator for more information     17 3 Secure Server Requirements    If you are taking credit card details for processing off line or if you are using one of the payment gateways that  require your site to take the credit card details  such as USA ePAY  you will need a secure server  This secure  server should operate from the same web root as your normal server  e g  all normal files can be accessed  under http    or https      please speak to your web hosting company for more information  However  please  refer to our Installation manual which contains advice on taking credit card details directly and why  in the  majority of circumstances  you should not consider doing so     201    Payment Gateways   Gateways 202    17 4 Gateways  17 4 1 2checkout    Server Requirements  There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with 2checkout     Where Are Credit Card Details Tak
130. either the Text or HTML versions of the newsletter  recipient to be able to automatically unsubscribe   Note  Unsubscribe link is not available for newsletters sent to   lt  Back     pdate Neveslette    Editing a newsletter    Recipient List  This select box allows you to select who should receive the newsletter  If you are using the affiliate system in  JShop Server you will also be able to select affiliates here to send them a separate newsletter     In addition to being able to send to the full mailing list for customers  you can select to send to only those with  certain customer account types  Note  A cross reference is done between the main subscribed newsletter  email list and the customer account database     only those customers who appear on the newsletter email list  will be emailed  others will not     With affiliates again you can send a newsletter to all affiliates or select only certain affiliate groups to send  newsletters tailored to them     Subject    This is the subject of the email message that will appear in the recipients email inbox     Content Text    This is the plain text version of the newsletter that will be sent to the recipient  If you do not wish to have a  plain text version of your newsletter then you should leave this field blank     140    Newsletter   Adding  Editing Newsletters 141    Content HTML    This is the HTML version of the newsletter that will be sent to the recipient  If you do not wish to have a HTML  version of your newsletter
131. elds are included when a search is done     Include Sections In Search    If set to YES the search routine will also search section titles and descriptions for matches and return those  results as well     Max Number of Sections To Return    If the above option is turned on  this sets the maximum number of sections that will be returned  This is a total  number of sections to return  there will not be any Previous or Next paging on the results     If 1 Product Found Take Directly To Product Page    If set to YES when a customer searches on your site  if there is only one product match they will be taken  directly to the product page  omitting the search results page     Activate Search Suggest    Setting this option to YES will activate the search suggest system  as long as the correct template additions are  in place for this   The search suggest will provide a drop down below the search box with products that match  the entered text     57    General Settings   Search Settings 58    Characters Trigger Limit    If set to a value above 0  the search suggest system will only provide suggestions once the entered number of  characters has been entered     Search On and Sort By  Here you can specify which product field you would like the search suggest to operate on and in what order  they will be returned  This include the product name  product code or a combination of both of them     Only Search From Start Of Field   When set to YES  the search suggest system will match the en
132. ely and use your own  manually coded Meta Tags if you wish     4 16 Stock Control Settings    JShop Server includes advanced stock control features that not only allow you to operate stock control on  individual products but also down to individual options or combinations of options  There are a number of  different ways in which the stock control can operate and the options here set some of the global stock control  options     Global Enable Stock Control   Send Warning Level Email    Send Zero Level Email    Use Warning Level Instead Of Zero For Stock Check      NO    Force Stock Check At Checkout  Show Product Level Stock On Section Structure    Update Settings       Stock Control Settings    Global Enable Stock Control     42    General Settings   Stock Control Settings 43    If set to YES  stock control is enabled in your store  You will still need to enable it for individual products  If set  to NO all stock control routines are bypassed     Send Warning Level Email  Against each product you can set a warning level  If the stock for this product falls below this warning level and  this option is set to YES  a warning level email will be sent  This email can be configured in Templates     Send Zero Level Email    Once a product reaches zero stock  or below  if this option is set to YES  an out of stock email will be sent   Emails will continue if the stock level falls even lower     Use Warning Level Instead Of Zero For Stock Check  If this option is set to YES  rather t
133. emplates with whatever text you  want to show  The default templates do use labels throughout but this is easy to change when editing the  templates     List Of Labels       Type   Number   Action  account Si Eq    affiliates 56 Eg  breadcrumb 1 Eq  cart 35 Eg  user 1 Ea  usersonline 2 Edit    words 2 ED    Total Labels   List Of Labels  shortened for display purposes        The list of labels gives you an overview of all the labels currently setup in JShop Server  The first column gives  the type of the label and this helps to split them up into logical groups for editing  This type is also used when   using the label in a template  For instance in type    account    there is a label called    accountHomeLink     This can   be included on a template by using  labels account accountHomeLink      In addition the    Add Label With New Type    allows you to add a new label type to the list     Adding   Editing Labels    Adding and editing labels use slightly different screens  Adding a label provides you with a single label entry  section along with an editable label name  as shown below     Label Text   English   Spanish    Label  spanish   Outlandish       Insert Label            Label Name           Adding a New Label    As you can see in the above image  alternatives are being entered for the different languages the shop is setup  for     When editing labels  a whole list of the labels within the type selected are shown on the screen allowing quick  and easy editing of the w
134. en   Credit card details are taken on 2checkout   s payment page     Settings Page Details    Account Number  This is the account number issued to you by 2checkout when you signed up for an account with them     Secret Word    This is the secret word you setup at 2checkout  This needs to be correct otherwise JShop Server will not  receive payment status notifications from 2checkout    What Do I Need To Setup At 2checkout     In your 2checkout administration system you should go to Shopping Cart   gt  Cart Details and set the following     Return to a routine on your site after credit card processed    Set this to Yes    Return URL     Set this to the gateways response 2checkout php URL on your server  e g   http   www yourdomain com jss gateways response 2checkout php   this will be different on your server and depends on where you installed JShop Server to      Next go into Account Details   gt  Return and set the following     Secret Word     Set this to the same secret word you entered into JShop Server   s 2checkout settings  This secret word setting  is right at the bottom of the Account Details   gt  Return page on 2checkout     17 4 2 Authorize net  17 4 2 1 Authorize net SIM    Server Requirements    There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with Authorize net SIM     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on Authorize net   s payment page     Settings Page Details  Login ID    202    Payment Gateways   Gateways 203  This 
135. end form     If you select    reCAPTCHA    then an additional section of the screen will be displayed which allows you to set  your options and account details for reCAPTCHA  These settings are as follows     reCAPTCHA is a free Captcha system available at http   www recaptcha com   To use it  sign up at that site and enter your public and private keys below     The display of reCaptcha can be altered using JavaScript  If you do not wish to use these    options  or want tio customise with our own JavaScript  select No for Incdude Customisation   Full documentation on the customisation options available for reCAPTCHA are available at       reCAPTCHA Settings    Public Key ee         This is where you should enter the public key that reCAPTCHA provided to you     Private Key  This is where you should enter the private key that reCAPTCHA provided to you     Include Customisation    39    General Settings   Captcha Settings 40    If selected this will activate output for JavaScript customisation options provided by the reCAPTCHA system   Only is this is set to YES will the following options become available     Theme    reCAPTCHA has a number of display styles and here you can select which display style you would like to use on  your site     Language Options   Depending on the languages you have setup in your store you will see the corresponding number of language  selection boxes  This allows you to select what language reCAPTCHA should display in for each language you  have se
136. ent   gt  Installations and set  the following against the correct installation ID     Return URL  The URL to use here is shown on the PayPoint Metacharge settings screen in JShop Server    Response URL  The URL to use here is shown on the PayPoint Metacharge settings screen in JShop Server    Password Protection    If you are password protecting the gateways response paypointmetacharge directory on your server ensure  that you enter the correct username and password at Paypoint in the  Response HTTP Auth Username    and     Response HTTP Auth Password  fields    17 4 20 PaySystems TPP Pro  Server Requirements    There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with PaySystems TPP Pro     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on the PaySystems TPP Pro payment page on their site     Settings Page Details  PaySystems Merchant ID    Your merchant ID as issued by PaySystems TPP Pro when you signed up for an account with them     219    Payment Gateways   Gateways 220    Payment Page Order Description  A description of the order that will be shown on the PaySystems TPP Pro payment page that the customer  sees     What Do I Need To Setup At PaySystems TPP Pro     You should not need to setup anything at PaySystems TPP Pro in order for transactions to be successfully  processed     17 4 21 PSiGate HTML    Server Requirements  There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with PSiGate HTML     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   
137. ents needed to integrate with Monseris eSelect PLUS Hosted Paypage    Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on the payment gateway   s payment page     Settings Page Details    PS Store ID  This is your account ID with the gateway     HPP Key  This is your Hosted Paypage Token  HPP Key  as issued by the gateway     Language  Choose between one of the available languages     this dictates what language the payment pages will be  shown in     Server    Here you should choose the test server whilst testing your setup and the live server when you are ready to put  your gateway integration into live more     What Do I Need To Setup At Moneris     You will need to create a hosted paypage within your Moneris account  When setting this up you can enter the  following details for JShop Server s integration     Response Method  Send to your server as a POST    Approved URL   see the JShop Server settings page for the gateway for the URL   Declined URL   see the JShop Server settings page for the gateway for the URL     17 4 14 Multicards  Server Requirements    There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with Multicards     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on Multicard   s payment page     Settings Page Details    Multicards Merchant ID  This is the merchant ID issued to you by Multicards when you signed up for an account with them     Description    This is the description of the order that will appear on 
138. er  Account Type High Volume   ze  Tax Exempt CG Mo O yes          Editing an existing customer    The fields shown on this screen are those from the    Customer Fields    setting page plus the following     Email Address    The email address of the customer  The system will not allow you to setup a customer with the same email  address as a customer that already exists in the store     Password    Only enter a password here if you want to set change a password for the customer  Left blank  any existing  password will be left unchanged     Account Type  This select box allows you to select which customer account type this customer belongs to  Please see the     Account Types    heading  discussed previously in this section  for more information on account types     Tax Exempt               This allows you to set whether the customer should be exempt from tax  This is useful if you re dealing with  other companies and tax rules allow zero tax  For instance  in the EU sales between VAT registered companies  should not be taxed  By default this is set to NO     153    Customers   ABC Customer Listing 154    11 7 ABC Customer Listing    This shows a list of customers in surname  forename order along with    Edit    and    Delete    buttons     11 8 Date Customer Listing    This shows a list of customer in descending date of sign up  with the newest first  It also shows Ed and     Delete    buttons     Total selected customers  514  Viewing 1   10    gareth20070310 whorl co uk 10 
139. er will contain the data that the user  or internally  see below  had in this  field at the time of ordering  In addition selecting this option will show this field on the checkout billing page for  those customers who do not have accounts     Internal Only      Selecting YES for this option will mean that the field is not shown to the customer and they can not fill it in   Instead this is only saved internally  Selecting both this and    Include When Ordering    would be useful for  making sure that internal accounts references for the customer are saved with the order and thus available for  export using the    Import Export    section of JShop Server     Visible  Setting this to NO will make a field invisible     Content  only available for SELECT type fields     This allows you to enter a list of options for a select box field  You can enter a new option by typing it in the  Option  box and either pressing return or clicking the    Add    button     Content    GO          Option   JS    Content Section Available For SELECT Type Fields    If you select an already entered option its contents will appear in the Option  box allowing you to change it   You can then click    Apply    to save that change     In addition the three little buttons on the right of the content box allow you to move items up and down the list   changing their display order  or  by clicking the red X  to delete an item completely     11 5 Delivery Address Fields    JShop Server has a standard set of de
140. erate signups  by setting this option to YES  Alternatively  setting this option to NO will activate the affiliate account straight  away     Activate 2nd Tier Feature    A second tier affiliate system provides two levels of commission on sales  Imagine this scenario  An affiliate  signs up and via the link on their web site another customer comes to your site and signs up as an affiliate   When that affiliate places a link to your site on theirs  any customer coming through and purchasing from your  site will create a commission for them  In addition  with the 2nd Tier feature you can set a commission level to  the original affiliate  through which this affiliate signed up  This is a 2nd Tier commission  Setting this option to  YES will activate the 2nd Tier commission functionality in the affiliate system     Minimum Payment Amount    182    Affiliates   General Options 183  This is the level over which you will pay out to affiliates  It is used when creating the    Show Payment Due List        Life Span Of Cookie   By adjusting this setting you can decide whether a customer who has come through an affiliate needs to  purchase on their first visit for the affiliate to obtain a commission  set this to 0 to operate like this  or whether  they can order at any time within    x    number of days for the affiliate to receive commission     Status Of Created Commission    Your affiliates will only see authorized transactions appear in their account administration  This option let
141. ere is a country level tax for the customer   s country  If a county state level tax appears for the  customer   s county state then this is used instead of the country level tax     95    Tax  Shipping   County  State Level Tax 96    Counties States   Un Taxed Counties States  Taxed Counties  States     Standard Tax Rate    Second Tax Rate       The County  State Level Tax Screen    Counties States entered can be moved from the left    Un Taxed    list to the right    Taxed    list  Any that appear in  the right list will then have applicable Standard and Second Tax Rate values applied should they be used by a  customer     Note  This screen is only available if you have changed the county and deliveryCounty fields to be select  boxes in Customers  Otherwise no county state tax can be calculated by JShop Server        6 7 Shipping Menu General Settings    On this screen you can specify some overall shipping options for your store     Shipping Enabled Ono    yes    Default Shipping    Show Shipping On Cart  O yo    yes    Update Settings       Shipping Menu General Settings    Shipping Enabled    Select YES if you want to include shipping in your store  select NO otherwise for no shipping charges to be  calculated     Default Shipping  This allows you to select the default shipping option that is selected when a customer checks out  If you have  alternative options for shipping the customer will still be able to change their method of shipping     Show Shipping On Cart    If 
142. ers   Orders List 193    Print       Receipt  5 Fold   avery  Delivery Note  Labels  Suppliers    Send Emails  Other  Delete Order  The Order Action Drop Down                15 2 Order Searching    At the bottom of the Jshop Server administration in the search panel are the order searching controls  These  stay on screen all the time you are in the order management system giving you quick access to them  There  are several different ways in which orders can be searched for     Note  Orders are always displayed with the most recent at the top of the list     Date Range  Here you can select a range  Today  Yesterday  Last 7 Days or Last Month  or you can select a month and year  to view     Status    This allows you to view orders by a specific order status and whether the order is marked as printed or  unprinted     Search String  This is a free text search that searches customer   s name  order number and customer   s email address     Printed  This allows you to select whether to show only printed  unprinted or all orders     Product Category  This allows you to select only orders that include products from a certain category in your store     193    Orders   Accessing an Order s Details 194    15 3 Accessing an Order s Details    To see the full details of an order  simply click the order number from the Orders List  This will show a screen  containing the product information at the top  followed by billing and delivery addresses  if applicable   then  payment details  proc
143. erver  In many circumstances it makes  sense to cache the bestsellers result as much of the time this list will not change  You can also set the amount  of time the cache should be kept before it is refreshed  The longer this time limit is  the longer the cache will  be used before refreshing     Cache Recommended Products    Recommended products  shown on individual product pages  constitutes the most complex mySQL query that  JShop Server performs  If you   re using the Recommended Products facility it is strongly recommended that you  cache these results  In addition  we would generally recommend that this cache is only refreshed once a day   so a valid time of 1440 should be used     Cache Rootsections    The main section list  shown on the left menu in the default template  can be cached using this option  This  vastly reduces the amount of work mySQL has to do for each page load  especially if you are retrieving    52    General Settings   Cache Settings 53    multiple sub sections for display on the section list  JShop Server will automatically handle the refreshing of  these cache results     4 24 XML Sitemap    JShop Server includes XML sitemap production  suitable for submitting to search engines such as Google  It  can maintain this automatically or you can re generate the sitemap as and when you need  To use the sitemap  facility you will need to have your cache directory setup correctly  please see the installation manual for more  information on permissions etc 
144. es   36 66 ex  tax    43 08 inc  tax   DES1 The Lone Tree   40 32 ex  tax    47 38 inc  tax   DES2 Twisted And Dry   33 31 ex  tax    39 14 inc  tax   DES3 Twilight Cactus   38 30 ex  tax    45 00 inc  tax   Total Number of Products  15       Searching for products to add to an order    15 4 2 Product Details Screen    Accessed by either clicking on the    Select Options    button or the product name or code on the product search  screen  this screen shows you more details about the product  allows you to make any selections that are  needed and gives a link to the product on your main web site  From here you can change the quantity to add  and change any selectable options     195    Orders   Editing Orders 196            Select Product Options Quantity Discounts       Excluding Tax Including Tax Combination Discount  Normal Price    470 00   470 00 Quantity  2   10   5 00   One Off Price    0 00   0 00          Please Select 4 Bottle    Red     2 99  e       On  O off    two v           buttons    LoeweOptions    CI red     1 18   blue   d pink   O green    O green     2 35         Quantity       Product Statistics    Minimum Order Quantity 0  Maximum Order Quantity 0  Main Stock Level  34          A typical product options screen when adding a product to an order    15 5 Creating New Orders    JShop Server includes the ability to create orders via  the administration interface  This uses exactly the same  screens as shown when editing an order  To create an order click on 
145. es both a means of capturing email addresses in your store  via  the Join Newsletter section  if used  and also when people order via  a checkbox on the billing details   Customers with accounts can also change their newsletter setting on the customer account details screen  If  you are using the Affiliates system within JShop Server you can also send newsletters to affiliates using the  Newsletter system     You are not forced to use the included Newsletter system if you do not want to  By using the Import Export  section of JShop Server the full mailing list that is used for the Newsletter can be exported for use outside of  the system     In addition to the actual Newsletter  this section of the administration system also provides a    Latest News     feature for your store where you can create news items for display in your store     Note  By default the newsletter options are    opt in    for the customer  Although this could be changed in  the templates  for instance when ordering or editing customer account details  to force inclusion in the    newsletter we strongly advise against this as there a number of laws that protect consumers from being  automatically included on mailing lists        10 1 Newsletter Options    This screen allows you to set some general options for newsletters that you send out using JShop Server        gareth whorl co uk   lt me there  com gt   info sldata com          Reply From Email Address For Newsletters       Newsletter Test Recipient   
146. escription  A free text field describing the order     Transaction Type  Here you can select SALE or PREAUTH    206    Payment Gateways   Gateways 207    What Do I Need To Setup At Cardsave     There is nothing that you need to setup at CardSave     17 4 6 ChronoPay    Server Requirements  There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with this gateway     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on the payment gateway   s payment page     Settings Page Details    Product ID Fields    ChronoPay will have provided you with individual IDs for each currency you can take in your store  You should  enter these here     Checkout Languages    Here you can specify what language the customer sees on the ChronoPay pages depending on what language  they were viewing your store in     Product Description  Descriptive text that appears on the ChronoPay payment page     What Do I Need To Setup At ChronoPay   You will need to setup the following options in your Chronopay Admin     Access URL   see the JShop Server settings page for the gateway for the URL     17 4 7 ecardon XML    Server Requirements  You will require your own secure server certificate  SSL  and CURL installed for PHP with secure sockets  support     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on your site  This integration does not support 3D Secure     Settings Page Details    Sender ID  This is the sender ID issued to you by the gateway when you signed up fo
147. essing details  dispatch information  any extra order fields and finally other fields such as  the standard internal notes field and the customer   s IP address     In addition to viewing orders singularly you can view a selection of orders at once by using the checkboxes on  the orders list page and you can print either a single order from the order details page or multiple orders at  once from the orders list page     15 4 Editing Orders    To edit an order click the    Edit    button in the Action column on the orders list page  From here you can update  many of the order   s settings and  in addition the top of the screen gives you access to editing of the actual  products and totals of the order     Remove  Product Code Product Details   Price Each Total Cost  0 ABS1 Filtered Fireworks UPDATE O  2420000     42 42             Goods Total   Shipping Total   3 4 Day  v rulat      Tax Total EE  Discount Tot Ji    Order Total                   Editing the products on an order    You ll see text entry boxes next to the Quantity boxes  Price boxes  Discount Total  Shipping Total  Shipping   Method and Tax Total lines  Here you can change the values for the order and click    Update Order Lines    for  them to take effect  For all these fields  except the shipping method  the current values are also shown for   clarity     Most product lines will show a check box next to the price field  When checked this will lock the price of the  product so  when you update the order lines ag
148. esults into the larger box on the left  Once you have performed a search clicking on the  product code or product name will add the product to the list on the right  which is the full list of products that  will be displayed on this product   s product page  The value entered in the Qty box below the search results will  be the quantity used when adding a product to the grouping  e g  if you enter 2 in the Qty box  2 of the  selected product will be included in the group product     Additionally you can alter the display order of the grouped products by selecting a product in the right hand    window and using the up and down arrows to move it up and down the list  Finally the red X will remove a  product from the list     Note  Currently you can only include products in a group product that have no selectable options     5 8 5 Advanced Pricing   Combinations       Qty Discounts    Base Pricing Combinations  3 attribute Combinations       one off Prices  Stock 75  bottle  Red  BUttons  On  options  All  LoeweOptions  All  test  All   Weight 30  bottle  Blue  BUttons  All  options  All  LoeweOptions  All  test  All        bottle  BUttons  options   LoeweOptions  test    Attribute  Value   0    EE    Quantities For the product with different options should be combined for any quantity discounts above  CG wo Ows  Advanced Pricing   Combinations Block  Qty Discounts is shown          This section takes product pricing and product attributes a step further with three different pri
149. etails       s sssssssnnusunnnnnnununnununnnnnnanunnnnannnnnnanannanannnnnnanannananannnnannnnananannnnannnnananannnnanannananannanan anna 72   ER KR CH DE 76   5 8 3 Digital Download Options     sssssssssusunsnnnnununnnnunnnnunanannunanunnnnunannunanannnnannnnnnannnnnnannnnanannnnnnanannanannnnnnanan na 77   5 8 4 Group Product Settings    ssssssssessusununnnnanunnnnunnnnnnanannnnanunnnnannnnananannnnannnnanunannnnannnnnnanannnnanannanannn nananana na 78   5 8 5 Advanced Pricing   Combinations   ssssssssssssussnsunnunnunnnnnunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannannnnnnn nannan nnmnnn annann 78    58 6  Stock Control iesisiisicseicscctasascaseadsarcecusiacssuccasocenssacsaducsauevaissacssuccdsauccasadcaduasateueisitaussidcaietsnssacsaadacandsanss 80    2 3 0 User Manual   Contents    5 9  5 10  5 11  5 12  5 13  5 14  5 15  5 16    Part 6  6 1  6 2  6 3  6 4  6 5  6 6  6 7  6 8  6 9    6 10    6 11  6 12  6 13    6 14  6 15    Part 7  7 1    7 2      7 3  7 4    5 8 7 Product Options   ssssssssssssunsnnnnnnununnununnnnnnnnunnnnannnnnnanannanannnnnnanannananannnnanunnanunannanannnnananannnnanannananan nananana na 81   5 8 8 Associated Products   sssssssssnsusunnnnunnnnnnanunnunannnnnnanannananunnnnannnnananunnnnanunnananannnnannnnnnanannnnanannananan nanan an na 82   5 8 9 Misc  OptiONS   sssssssunsnsununnununnnnnnununnnnunnnnnnnnunnunannnnnnanannanannnnnnanannananannnnannnnananannanannnnananannnnanannanannn nananana na 82   5 8 10 Other Languages  sssssssssssnsnnnnununnnnunnnnnn
150. eth  whorl co uk      No    YES       SMTP Server Email Options    Server Address  Here you enter the address of the SMTP server you wish to use     Server Port    Here you enter the port that you wish to connect to the server on  This would normally be 25 although some  third party email services  such as http   www authsmtp com  also provide alternative port access     Requires Authentication    If you select YES for this option you can then enter the Server Username and Server Password in the boxes  below  Many third party SMTP services will require username and password authentication     8 2 Email Templates    Emails sent from the system use exactly the same template language as the HTML template     the in built tSys  template system     and can have plain text and HTML versions  For more information on using this template  language please see the    tSys     The JShop Server Template Language    section     113    Templates   Email Templates                Order Confirmation  Subject  New Order Placed       Subject  Order  order  ordernumber  PAID   Subject  Order  order ordernumber  DECLINED   Subject   company  companyName  Order Confirmation  order  ordernumber    Subject   company  companyName  Dispatch Confirmation  order order ger    Subject   oftcertificate fromname  Has Sent You a  company companyName  Git Certificate   Subject  test pd status change    25 Status Change   On Hold Customer Y  Subject  Your Order Has Been Placed On Hold    List of Email Templates
151. f Count  aff Poste    200px  ty   gt        Save   Close    122    Templates   Remove Compiled 123    8 9 Remove Compiled    This screen allows you to remove all the currently compiled templates for each of the installed template sets   This is useful if you want to make sure that all the compiled templates are up to date as the first time a  template is needed if a compiled version doesn   t exist  one will be created     8 10 Snippets    Snippets are long section of text or HTML that you can include in your templates  This allows you to change   for instance  the welcome text on the front page without having to edit the templates  Snippets  in contrast to  Labels  can have both a title and a main content  In the default templates the news section on the left hand  menu uses both the title and the content of the Snippet called News  Changing the information for a snippet  will update what is shown immediately     Some snippets are setup by default and are used in the default templates  However  you do not have to use  those that are setup by default and you can setup as many other snippets as you would like to use     Snippets are fully multi language as well and if you have alternative languages setup for your store the adding  and editing screens allow you to enter alternative language versions of both the title and the content of the  snippet     List Of Snippets    Name   Title Action    AdvancedSearch Eg    AffiliateSignup Eq    AffiliateSignupThanks Your Application Ha
152. f Offer Codes    The list of offer codes gives you details of the code itself and the amount it is for  Each line has an    Edit    and a     Delete    button as well     12 11 1 Adding Editing Offer Codes    Adding and editing offer codes uses the same screen  The screen is split into several sections as follows     General    173    Checkout   List of Offer Codes 174     GoodsTotal dw  British Pounds       NO YES   This option does not apply to   offers     SN NO YES       NO H YES  General Section of the Offer Codes Screen    Code  This is the text you will require the customer to enter in order to redeem the code     Offer Type ec  There are several discount options available here     Goods Total   This type will apply the offer code to the entire goods total of the cart  It can still be limited  so that it only comes into effect if the    Requires Products    section is met    Shipping Total   This type will apply the offer code to the entire shipping total of the cart  It can still be  limited so that it only comes into effect if the  Requires Products    section is met    Qualifying Products  Cheapest Free   This will apply an 100  discount to the cheapest qualifying  product from the  Requires Products  section that is in the cart    Qualifying Products  Most Expensive Free   This will apply an 100  discount to the most expensive  qualifying product from the  Requires Products    section that is in the cart    Qualifying Products  Discount   This will apply the specif
153. form field on the page and maximum length is the maximum number of  characters a customer can enter into the field     Columns and Rows  only for TEXTAREA type fields     This is the number of columns and rows that the field should be sized to on the contact form page     Validation  Validate For and Validation Message    If you want to make it a requirement that a field is filled in you should select YES for the Validation radio  button  In addition  with the Validate For option  you can select how you want the field validated  There are a  number of built in validation types  such as Not Blank or Email Address and  in addition  choosing    Custom  Regex     allows you to enter a Perl style regular expression for the validation  permitting complex validation  routines to be used  If you are not sure how to use regular expressions or wish to find some for your particular  need a good site is http   regexlib com  where you will find many that you can enter here     Finally the Validation Message is the error message you wish to display if the validation or the field fails and  requires the user to re input information     NOTE  The regular expression validation uses Perl style regular expressions  This has changed in version    2 3 0 from POSIX due to the depreciation of the ereg group of functions in PHP       Visible  Setting this to NO will make a field invisible     187    Affiliates   Affiliate Fields 188    Content  only available for SELECT type fields     This allows y
154. g a visit  If set to YES  you can specify the number of octets   sections  of the IP address to use  If you are using this it s also advisable to activate the    Track IP With Cookie   option for those customers whos IP address changes  NOTE  This option is not recommended for those  running http    and https    on different domains     IP Octets  sections  to Include    255   check this octet  xxx   ignore  For those customers where IP addresses can change you may try using  255 XXX XXX XXX at the least to check a main group of IP addresses  although this may still cause isolated issues  depending on their ISP NOTE  Only applicable if Check IP Address  is set to YES     Track IP With Cookie    If you are checking IP addresses it is advisable to enable this option which will help to maintain a session for  those on changing IP addresses  This is only really of any use if your http    and https    are running on the  same domain  or you are not running an SSL certificate on your store  NOTE  Only applicable if Check IP  Address    is set to YES     Action on Hash Check Failure    Under most circumstances if a cart hash check fails it is advisable to create a new cart  copying the contents of  the existing cart but blanking out customer login information  This would avoid a valid customer s cart from  being accidentally dropped if their IP address changes    Check Referrer    This option will check the referrer value when a customer visits the site with a session in the URL  If
155. g from receipt  printing to customer emails and dispatch functionality  Orders can be edited and the order status system allows  you to keep track of orders at every step of the way     Administration System   Administration System Layout 10    2 1 Administration System Layout    Shop Server v2 0 0 b4 Administration  Gareth Lancaster  administrator    Mozilla Firefox    Die   L  t yew Go Gooknets Joos biep  EIERE ES ET ECK NS EN    Users  gt General Contents Customers DAlthates  gt  Temelates  PLogs PRegexts Sinti vert D gt  Newsletter Siaf  ereo  gt  Checkout    Templates Meru    Emad Opora       wf   New Order Placed   ayment Confirmed from Payment Gateway  Subject  Order  order  cedernumber  PAID    Payment Failed from Payment  Subject  Order  order  cedernumber  DECLINED    Order Confirmation   Subject  company comparnName  Order Confirmation  order ordernumber   Despatch Confirmation   Sa t   c0 y compan tisme  Oepatch Confirmation torder ordernumber     12 Emad Gilt Certificate    t  ioftcert ficate fromname  Has Sert You a  company    Giat  Prodat doroductshock code  Stock Warning Level Reached          The JShop Server Administration System  The overall structure of the administration system is split into 4 parts  the top menu  the left sub menu  the    main content area of the screen and the bottom search panel  In addition there is a built in announcements  system which is show on the main administration screen     The Menu Bar    All the main functions are accessed
156. g or editing     Allowed Access For This Group   Here you ll see a long list of various permissions that you can grant or deny access to for this group  Any option  that is checked will give members of the user group permission  any un checked option will mean that  members of the group do not have permission     You ll also see    Check All    and    Uncheck All    against the light blue main section lines  These enable you to  quickly set all the section   s sub options either checked or un checked     3 4 List of Users    This page shows you a list of all the user accounts currently setup in the system  Either clicking on the    Edit     button or on the username will take you through to the user editing page  Clicking the    Delete    button will  remove the user account  this is not available for the main administrator account      14    User Management   List of Users 15    User ID   Username Real Name Member Of  administrator Gareth Lancaster Administrators Ea View Log    gareth Gareth Administrators Ey View Log    test test Administrators Eg View Log    Contents And Orders Only  testest testet Administrators Edit   Delete   View Log  Total Number of Users        List Of Users Screen    In addition the third button    View Log    will show you an action log just for that user  making it easy to track the  actions of an individual user in the system     3 5 Adding Editing a User  The users details screen  obtained by clicking    Edit    on the List of Users or by clicki
157. gital  products  registration names and registration codes are requested and stored by JShop Server     Activate Digital Products Support   O  yo    yes    Download Key Valid Time In Hours   0   no time limit on download key     Download Key Number Uses     0   no maximum number of uses on download key     Download Files Directory z  development web jss system files     It is important that this directory be protected From direct web access     Activate Instant Dispatch Ono    ves    Digital products that do not require registration details will be dispatched  when order is PAID if this and    Allow Partial Dispatching    are set to YES       Update Settings    Digital Products Settings    Activate Digital Products Support  If set to YES  digital products are activated and a new block will appear on the product editing screen allowing  you to specify the download file for the product and registration details settings     Download Key Valid Time In Hours  This allows you to set how long a download key generated by JShop Server should remain valid  After this time  limit has expired the key can no longer be used  Set this to 0 for the time limit to be ignored     Download Key Number Uses   This allows you to set how many times a file may be downloaded  or attempted to be downloaded  before the  key can no longer be used  Once the number has been reached the key can no longer be used  Set this to 0 for  the time limit to be ignored     Download Des Directory    46    General Set
158. gs    is clicked the most ever users online figure and date will be reset     60    General Settings   Send to a Friend Fields 61    4 32 Send to a Friend Fields    The send to a friend page  template send2friend html  is a page in your store where customers can send a link  to the current page they   re on to their friends  This section of the administration system allows you to setup  the fields that you would like the customer to fill in  There are 4 field types available     sf_fromemail Your Email Address TEXT    sf_fromname    Your Name TEXT    sf_toemail Your Friend s Email Address TEXT    sf_toname Your Friend s Name TEXT  sl message Your Message TEXTAREA Eg  Total Fields  5    Sort   Reorder Fields    List of contact form fields    TEXT Single line entry field  TEXTAREA Multiple row entry field       SELECT A select box of options  CHECKBOX Single check box    Each of the fields can be validated and validation messages displayed if they are not filled in        4 32 1 Adding Editing Send to a Friend Fields    Adding and editing contact form fields uses the same screen  However  some of the options are only available  for certain types of fields  Options available are as follows     Type TEXT  Name sf_Fromname    Te Fune id   Size   Maximum Length   Validation Ono    yes   Validate For CT  Validation Message    Language  Spanish  The D  Vaidatio Messege  id    Language  Outlandish    ZZ Pod  vakdaon Messegej   Update Field    Editing a TEXT extra field  showing option
159. han using 0 as the level to determine if a product should be considered out  of stock  the warning level set against the product will be used instead     Force Stock Check At Checkout    When set to YES and the customer tries to checkout a final stock check will be performed  If any of the  products in the cart are found to be out of stock or have limited stock the customer will be notified  The  template cartstockproblem html is used for this notification     Show Product Level Stock On Section Structure    If set to YES an extra column will appear on the section structure page showing the product level stock for the  product  if applicable   Note  This will not show the stock levels for any option level stocks you have set     4 17 Order Admin Settings    One of JShop Server   s best features is the comprehensive order management that comes built in  The system  can operate in a number of different ways  offering different functionality tailored to your needs and uses  This  section allows you to change how the order administration in JShop Server works     Activate Dispatch Functionality No    ees    Dispatch Button on Orders Screen  o yo YES  The dispatch option is also available from the order processing drop down box    e ve    Email Address   gareth whorl co uk      NO    YES       JShop Server includes a fully configurable order management system    Activate Dispatch Functionality    If you do not wish to use the dispatch functionality  e g  marking orders as dispatch
160. he  payment details page should they choose to pay by credit card  You cannot add fields to this list and you cannot  delete them but you can set some fields to be invisible should you not want it to appear     Note  If you are not using a payment gateway you should not  under any circumstances  make the ccCVV  field visible for the customer to enter     The ccType field which is a select box of accepted credit card types has validation that uses a built in routine  within JShop Server  The credit card names you enter determine whether or not this validation is carried out   Entering the following credit card names exactly as shown below will be validated for correctness as far as is  possible     Visa  Mastercard  American Express  Discover  JCB  Diners Club  Switch  Solo    Any other card types that are sent to the credit card validation routine will simply return true as it will have no  basis on which to accept or decline it for validation     Name Title Type Action        ccName Name on Credit Card mer Eg  ccNumber Credit Card Number mer En  ccExpiryDate Expiry Date  mmjyy  TEXT Eq  ccType Credit Card Type SELECT Eg  ccStartDate Start Date TEXT Eg  ccIssue Issue Number  Switch   Solo Only  TEXT Eg  ccC     C     3 Digit Number TEXT   Edit      Idee    Total Fields  7    Sort   Reorder Fields       List of Credit Card fields    161    Checkout   Credit Card Fields 162    12 4 1 Editing Credit Card Fields  You can edit some of the information against the credit card detail
161. he newsletter     Email Addresses To List Per Page  This option sets the number of newsletter email records to show per page on the    Subscribed Emails    page     Convert Line Breaks To  lt br  gt  on News Items    This gives you the option of having JShop Server automatically convert line breaks to  lt br  gt  tags when  displaying news items on your site  If you set this to NO you will have to enter your own line breaks     Note  If you have the WYSIWYG editor turned on  this option will have no effect     Sending  Emails Per Batch   JShop Server sends the newsletter out in batches  refreshing the sending page after each batch to keep you up  to date on progress  This setting dictates how many emails are sent in each batch  A typical setting would be  around 50     100  However  if you experience time outs you should lower this setting to take into account the  speed of your mail server     Sending  Automatically Process Next Batch    When set to YES  no user input is required between sending each batch  the page reloads and the next batch  is sent automatically  If set to NO  the sending screen will require you to click on a link in order to send the  next batch  For most  a setting of YES would normally be used here     10 2 List of Newsletters    This screen provides a list of all the newsletters you have setup using JShop Server  Newsletters are not  automatically deleted once sent  so they can be sent again should you wish     Date Subject   Recipient List Status Act
162. he testvendor Vendor ID     Description    Enter a description for the order that will appear on Page Dave payment page     Transaction Mode    Sage Pay provide both a test mode and a live mode  If you are testing with the testvendor details ensure that  you also use    Test Mode    here     Authorisation Mode    Protx provide    Full Authorisation    where payment is taken straight away and    Deferred    where payment is only  taken after it is released by you in Sage Dave administration system     Apply AVS CV2 Check    This allows you to fine tune how you want AVS and CV2 checking to be applied to orders  For more  information please refer to Sage Pay   s own integration documentation     Apply 3D Secure  This allows you to fine tune how you want 3D Secure checking to be applied to orders  For more information  please refer to Sage Pay   s own integration documentation     What Do I Need To Setup At Sage Pay     If you are using the Simulator at Sage Pay you will need to ensure that you activated the VSP Direct option in  order to test the gateway integration correctly  You will also need to ensure that you have setup your full Sage  Pay account correctly  including your server   s IP address  in order to allow transactions to be sent to their  system correctly  It is important to familiarise yourself with Sage Pay   s own documentation for the VSP Direct  system as it is highly configurable     Test card numbers  house numbers  postcodes and CVS numbers can be located in
163. he various searches that can be performed in the  administration system  For instance  search for products or orders  Clicking the    Search Panel    text will hide or  show the search panel  Often you ll probably want to hide the search panel when it   s not in use to provide  greater screen space for the main content     JShop Server Announcements    The administration system includes an embedded announcements system that we can use to alter customers  to product information  details on security patches and information on new releases  In addition to a button  being provided on the top left of the screen  if there is a new announcements that a logged in user has not yet  read a strap line will appear underneath the top menu bar with the title of the announcement     The announcements facility can be activated or de activated for individual users in the Users section of the  administration system     11    Administration System   User Options 12    2 2 User Options    On the top left of the screen there is a button called    User Options     This provides each individual user with the  ability to alter some facilities of the administration system to suit their preferred way of working                 Show Left Hand Section Menu    Ono    ves    no Ows       Search Panel Expanded At Login        Default Page At Login          Main Menu Mouse Button Configuration        Action Menu Position On Orders List        Action Menu Activate           Close Window   Update Options     
164. hem     Custom Selection    As browsers are constantly being released and as it   s impossible to code in every single browser available into  JShop Server  here you can enter up to three different custom detection strings to pick up additional browsers   For each option all the keywords you enter have to be found in the visiting browser   s user agent string in order  to make a positive match     Use Template Set  Here you can select which of your currently installed template sets to use as the default     8 8 Template Editing    JShop Server include a simple template editor for managing your templates  The Template Navigation  as  show below  allows you to navigate through the template directories  You can click on a template name in  order to bring up the template editing screen in a pop up  Templates are shown in black and directories are  shown in blue     121    Templates   Template Editing    Template Editing       Template Settings    09 06 2006 10 55  09 06 2006 10 55  14 03 2007 16 42  14 03 2007 16 43  16 03 2007 17 08  05 07 2006 16 35  05 07 2006 21 11  05 07 2006 15 07  30 06 2006 12 15  14 03 2007 16 36  14 03 2007 16 36  05 11 2006 19 50  14 03 2007 16 52  05 11 2006 20 56  16 03 2007 16 59  02 07 2006 14 36     Edit   x    Edit   x    Edit   x    Edit   x    Edit   x    Edit   x    Edit   x    Edit   x    Edit   x    Edit   x    Edit   x    Edit   x    Edit   x    Edit   x  v    Note  You cannot navigate any higher than the main JShop Server directory for sec
165. hey haven t yet seen  they ll also see a strap line underneath the top menu providing  details of the new announcement     15    User Management   Adding  Editing a User 16    Login Enabled   You can enable and disable individual user accounts  Checking the NO option will mean that you cannot login to  the administration system with this user account  Checking YES will enable the account for login     Member Of    This section allows you to provide membership of user groups to the user  Multiple groups can be selected   allowing you to combine certain permission groups together for a single user     Note  Permissions are inclusive  If access to a section is denied in one group and allowed in another group       and the user is a member of both groups  they will be given access     3 6 Management Options    This screen gives you some global options for the user management of JShop Server  The options are as  follows     NO      YES  This will not affect any user assigned to the  Administrators user group    NO      YES  NO     YES     No YES    This will not affect any user assigned to the  Administrators user group    User Account Security Settings      NO YES  Those using AOL should not activate this option  as the IP address will change between page loads    p  minutess  0   no timeout   It is advisable to use this option to ensure   that logins do not remain open indefinitely through  lack of action or failure to use the logout button    Block an account after  5 _Junsucce
166. his is an automatically generated list of products from JShop Server  If you are not within a particular  section  the random products are taken from the whole product database  if you are in a particular section of  the shop the products are taken from the current section and any sections on the next level down  So  as you  move deeper into sections  the possibilities returned by the random products become more and more tailored  to the current section  keeping them relevant     Product Selection Limit    This option allows you to set whether the random products list should only choose products specific to the  section you are in  and below  For instance  on the front page  products from the entire store will be chosen   but as you drill down using the sections  setting this to    Section Specific    will limit which products are included  in this list     Other Lists    Maximum New Products To List    A product is set to being new in the product information screen  This allows you to set a maximum number of  new products to send to the templates     Maximum Top Products To List    Again a product is set to being a top product on the product information screen  This allows you to set a  maximum number of top products to send to the templates     Maximum Special Offers To List  Once again set in the product information screen     Maximum Recommendations To List    Recommendations are an automatically produced list of products shown on a product page  JShop Server  calculates 
167. hole type  In addition there is a check box at the end of each label   s row that  if  checked  will delete the label when you click the    Update Labels    button  A typical edit screen is shown over the    page     125    Templates   Labels 126          Label Name   Label Text  Delete  copyrightText  English   This site and all contents are  Spanish   Outlandish   S  email English  0O  Spanish    O OO  Outlerder  O  telephone  English  0  Spanish    o O  Outlerder  O  years English  2003 2006 IT   Spanish  1  ows   lt  Back   Update Labels            Editing All The Labels In    copyright       8 12 Open Shop    The links here allow you to open the shop in a number of different template modes  If your shop is already live  and you want to force some templates to recompile you can use the    With Force Compile On     This will allow  you to navigate the store and each page you view will be recompiled  All other users on the site will still be  using the currently compiled version  presuming you are operating the templates compiled  until you view that  page in this mode  Once you have forced the template to recompile all other users on the site will then use the  newly compiled version     Using    With Uncompiled On    means that the store will open and use the normal templates rather than the  compiled versions  This is useful if you re making some changes to the templates but don   t want normal users  to see them yet  as they will still be using the compiled versions    
168. hould you have GD enabled in PHP  the ability for the system to resize images at upload     Zem Sr   Olne    C  Remove Image    Image Display Dimensions  x  yi  Use 0 for x or y to only scale by one dimension   Resize Images At Upload   O yo    wes 1f JPG  use this quality setting   100  best        Mb upload          C  Remove Image  Image Display Dimensions  x  vil   Jose 0 for x or y to only scale by one dimension   Dimensions When Shown  x  yi  Use 0 for x or y to only scale by one dimension     In Cart    Dimensions When Shown  x  yi  Use 0 for x or y to only scale by one dimension     In Navigation Bars    Resize Images At Upload   O  yo    yES If IPG  use this quality setting    75  default  _v    EE Upload        C  Remove Image    Image Display Dimensions  x  yi  Use 0 for x or y to only scale by one dimension   Resize Images At Upload   O yo    wes IF JPG  use this quality setting   100  best  v    Defaut Image Ss os    C  Remove Image    Image Display Dimensions  x  yi  Use 0 for x or y to only scale by one dimension   Resize Images At Upload   O yo    yes If JPG  use this quality setting    75  default       These directory paths are appended to your main shop images path  which is set to   z  Development web JSS system shopimages     Product Main Images products normal   Product Thumbnail Images    products thumbnails     Product Extra Images products extras     sections normal   Section Thumbnail Images    sections thumbnails   Section Extra Images sections extr
169. i anan kerine araen a neuke rE EE KREE EEER KREE KREE KR KEE KREE ER KEE KREE EERKREn 14  Adding  Editing a User          csseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeaeee KA uona eneeeeeeneeeee 15  Management Options         csccceeeseeeeeeeenneeeeeseaaeeeeseaaeeeeanaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaseeeseaaeeeeaeaaeeeeas 16  Viewing Log Des         xkeeEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEERKKREEEERKKREEEERRKREEEEREKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEEERKREEEEERKREEEERRE 17  Clearing the Log Files      c1scccccsesseeeeeeeseeeeneeceeeenneseeeaeeeseeeaenegaeeaeeeaaeeseeegeeeaenesaeeaeonsneesnonas 18  General Settings 19  Company Details creii akaa Oa a Ea anaa E AN Gi ira Aa 19  Global Options  s sors rerus ennan eraren hwdis hE NAN KAEN RNN ENa EErEE RENA NNa u hEN R EUREN n RANAN EAEn ENEN V ER EEAS 20  Cart Sessions  amp  Security Settings e EERRREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERRERKEEEEN 22  Gener  l SettingS sssr rirarisierueriureru runerne nanu aNuna narr Naai E Nena A KEPENEK LEENE NENNE CENE   N DENEKIN NEVE NAEEEE 25  WYSIWYG Settings      essornisonusnrunnununnununo urnan nn nunnu Pan nena E NNOO NENEN NASE nE nAaR NONNE ENANAR UENEN Enni E aE 26  CUrrency Settings uk eEEERRKREEEERKKREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERRERKREEEN 26   4 6 1 Adding Editing a CUrrenCy   ssssssssssssunnnnunannnnunannnnununnnnanannnnanunnnnanannnnanannnnnnunnnnanannnnanannnnannnnnnanannnnan nnn 27   4 6 2 Live Exchange Rate Service   ss ss ssssssssunennnnnnnnunnunnnn
170. icle browser page for that article  In addition you will see    Edit    and    Delete    buttons  for each section shown     90    Contents   Articles 91       Total selected artides  13  View     1 Article Home This is the main article holder and the information on it would not normally be shown Y  2 Bottom Links BottomLinks Holder for sub articles for bottom links in default templates  10 Delivery Costs  6 Help Help Help article for your store   News    20 News Article Two   8 Privacy Policy Privacy Your store s privacy policy   11 Safe Shopping With Us   7 Terms  amp  Conditions TermsConditions The terms and conditions for you store     lt    lt   lt   lt   lt   lt   lt   lt   lt        An example article listing screen  this is an ABC Article list     5 16 4 Invisible Articles Listing    This is displayed in the same format as the ABC Articles Listing but this one only shows those articles that  currently have their Visible field set to NO     91    Tax  Shipping   92    JShop Server includes full tax and shipping support  both of which can be configured in a number of different  ways  The Tax   Shipping sections of the administration covers both tax and shipping and also the main list of  countries for your store     6 1 Main Country List    This is where you can add  edit and delete countries from the main country list used by JShop Server     Total selected countries  237  Viewing 211   240       Tonga TO 776 Y za  Trinidad And Tobago TT 780 Y za  Tunisia TN 788 Y Dele
171. ied discount amount  see below  to all the  qualifying products from the  Requires Products    section that are in the cart    Qualifying Products  Set Price   This will apply a fixed price to all the qualifying products from the     Requires Products  section that are in the cart     Amount    Here you can supply the actual discount either as a percentage or a fixed amount in any of the currencies in  your store  For  Qualifying Products  Cheapest Free and    Qualifying Products  Most Expensive Free    this field  does not apply     Value Excludes Tax     Select YES here if the value you have entered  this does not apply to percentage discounts  should be used by  the system as including any tax already     Discount Tax   Select YES here if you want to discount tax as well as goods shipping values     Discount Active   Select YES to ensure that the discount is active in your store or NO to turn it off     Usage Limitations    174    Checkout   List of Offer Codes 175    Allow Multiple Use By Same Person  o yo YES    Only Allow If Goods Total  gt  GBP 0 0000 USD 0 0000 EUR O 0000 CAN O 0000    Only Allow If Total Quantity  gt        The Usage Limitations Section of the Offer Codes Screen    Valid From    If you wish to select a date when this offer code becomes active  select it here  This allows you to setup offer  codes to come into effect in the future     Expires i  Here you can specify that the offer code should expire on the given date  or select No to create an offer c
172. imported or exported and  are as follows     Additional Import Information      First row contains column headings     yo    yes    Field Delimiter  Seperator     Text Qualified by Quote Marks       Additional Import   Export Information    First row contains column headings   For imports this means that the first row contains column headings and this first line will be ignored  For  exports this means that the first line in the export will contain all the column heading you have included in the  correct order     Feld Delimiter  Separator     This describes how each field in a record is separated  The choices are Tab  Comma  SemiColon or Pipe     Text Qualified by Quote Marks    If YES is selected  for imports all starting and ending quote marks on a text field will be stripped before being  put into the database  For exports  all text fields will be surrounded by quote marks     9 4 Importing    When on an import screen the left hand select box shows a list of all the possible fields that JShop Server will  recognise for the import and the right hand screen should contain a list of all the fields in your import CSV file  in the correct order  If there are extra fields in your CSV file you can use the special SKIP_FIELD field from the  left hand box to tell JShop Server to skip the field  as it   s not needed     128    Import Export   Importing 129    Location Of Import File             File To Import    Upload From Computer       E evelopment web JSS system admin     Impor
173. in             Glow Seperate Delivery Address Ono    ves  Make County DeliveryCounty Field A Select Box  O yo    ves  New Accounts Default Account Type       Minimum Password Length    4 characters      Update Settings             General Settings    Allow Customer Accounts    If set to YES  customers will be allowed to open accounts  otherwise customer accounts will not be available in  your store     Automatically Login On Account Creation    If set to YES  when a customer opens an account they will automatically be logged in  This means that  for  instance  during checkout  they will immediately go to the next stage of ordering without having to enter their  login details again     Take Customer To Account At Login   If set to YES  the customer will automatically be forwarded to their account home page when they login   otherwise they will either be taken back to the previous page or  in some circumstances where this is not  possible  taken back to the front page of the store     Allow Separate Delivery Address  If this option is set to NO  the ordering system will not allow the entry of a separate delivery address and  customers will only be allowed to purchase giving their billing address     Make County  DeliveryCounty Feld A Select Box   This option changes the county state fields that JShop Server uses  If set to YES these fields will become select  boxes  rather than text entry field  The purpose of this is if you need to provide a set list of counties   states for  
174. in your administration system     On the    List of Users    page you can click the    View Log    button against an individual user to see just actions  made by that user     17    User Management   Clearing the Log Files 18    3 8 Clearing the Log Files  If you are logging all user actions the log database can soon grow quite large and so  periodically  we suggest  that you clear the log files  This can be done from the    Clear Actions Log File    link on the Users menu     18    General Settings   19    The General section of JShop Server   s administration system is where you setup most of the fundamental  options for your store  The menu in this section is split into two     General Menu    These options are where you can setup global options such as company details  languages  currencies etc  and  also options that alter the configuration of the administration system     Shop Navigation Menu  These options cover some of the navigation elements to your shop such as how many products are listed on a  section page  how you want to sort the basket etc     Note  As the options in General are powerful and can make large changes to your store  for instance       adding and removing a currency  we suggest that few users are given access to this section     4 1 Company Details    This is where you can setup the basic company details for your store  Many of the pre installed templates and  email templates use the information you enter here  so it should be applicable for public 
175. ings 30    4 7 1 Adding Editing a Language    Adding and editing a language both use the same screen  Details of the fields are given below     Language Uses Double Byte Encoding GO vo O ves     e g  Japanese     Update Language    Editing an existing language       Name    This is the name of the language  Normally this would be the name shown to the customer to select the  language  the default templates with JShop Server use this      Visible   Setting this to NO will mean that the language isn   t visible from the front end shop  This is useful if you wish to  add a language but need to enter in additional language information for products etc  before you want the  language to be visible     Language Uses Double Byte Encoding    Some language  such as Japanese  use Double Byte encoding for characters  If the language you are adding or  editing is like this please select YES for this option to ensure that JShop Server handles the encoding correctly     4 8 Extra Product Fields    In addition to the normal product information that JShop Server allows  you can setup additional product  information fields with this section  For instance  this is where you can setup option fields that the customer  has to select  extra image fields or extra descriptive test fields  You can also change their display order by  using the    Sort  Reorder Extra Fields    button     Exclude Loop  photographer Photographer TEXT  bottle Please Select 4 Bottle SELECT  YourName Your Name USERINPUT Dele
176. ion     13 Jan 2005 Full Mailing List NOT SENT Eg Hgg  O4 Nov 2003 NO   TEST 4 Affiliate Group High Profile SENT  O4 Nov 2003 NO  YEMBER TEST 3 Account Type High Volume SENT Eq  O4 Nov 2003 november newsletter test 2 Full Mailing List SEND INCOMPLETE Eq Resume                  04 Aug 2003 sending to the whole group  Full Mailing List SEND INCOMPLETE ZER    Eq Reset        O1 A4pr 2003 Test newsletter Full Mailing List SENT           Total Newsletters     List of Newsletters    Against each newsletter shown you will see the date the newsletter was created  the intended recipient list  and the current send status  The status will be one of the following     NOT SENT This shows that the newsletter has not currently been sent out  from the system     SENT This shows that the newsletter has been sent out from the  system    BEING SENT This shows that the newsletter is currently being sent out by  JShop Server  Please see below for more information on this        138    Newsletter   List of Newsletters 139    SEND INCOMPLETE The send process was started but has not yet been finished     Along with each newsletter listed there is are    Edit        Delete    and    Test    buttons  The    Test    button will send a  copy of the newsletter  via email  to the test recipient email address as specified in the    Newsletter Options     screen     In addition  depending on the status of the newsletter a fourth button may be seen  If the newsletter has not  been sent this button will say  
177. is is a catch all option     Price   After the word price you ll see either Flat Rate or Multiplication which tells you how the shipping costs are  calculated for this shipping type  For instance  if the shipping type was flat rate  the price you enter here would  be the final shipping cost  If the shipping type was multiplication  the price you enter here would be multiplied  by the shopping carte    Value To Use     either Quantity  Goods Total or Weight   For instance  if you were using  Goods Total as the    Value To Use    in the shipping type and this rate   s From value was 1 and to value was 100  to be charged by a Multiplication  when a customer with a goods value of 56 tried to checkout  the price you  enter here would be multiplied by 56 to give the shipping cost     Zone    This allows you to select the zone that this rate is applicable to  Different zones for the same shipping type can  have completely different rates associated with them     100    Taxi Shipping   Couriers 101    6 10 Couriers    Linked to dispatching in JShop Server you can assign a courier to an order when dispatching  This information  can then be carried across in emails to the customer to allow them to quickly and easily track their order        List of Couriers    The courier page lists all the couriers you have setup in the system along with a button to select one as the  default  The default will be the option selected when you go to the dispatching screen  Each courier has an     Edit  
178. is the login ID issued to you by Authorize net when you signed up for an account with them     Transaction Key  This is a valid transaction key for your Authorize net account  These can be created in your Authorize net  administration system     Test Mode    When set to YES no live transactions will take place via  Authorize net  Set to NO when you do wish to process  live transactions     Description  This is the description of the order that you would like to appear on the Authorize net payment page     Send Customer Email From Authorize net  If set to YES the customer will also receive an email confirming their payment from Authorize net    What Do I Need To Setup At Authorize net     You need to ensure that you set the Response Receipt URL correctly in your Authorize net administration  system  On the settings page for Authorize net in JShop Server you will be told what the correct URL should be  for this  Make sure you use this exactly otherwise JShop Server will not receive responses from Authorize net     In addition you need to make sure that the transaction key you enter into JShop Server is a valid transaction  key for your account     17 4 2 2 Authorize net AIM    Server Requirements  You will require your own secure server certificate  SSL  and CURL installed for PHP with secure sockets  support     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on your site     Settings Page Details    Login ID  This is the login ID issued to you by Authorize
179. iscounts Screen    Products In These Sections    This section allows you to pick which sections you wish to include in the discount  Only products that appear in  the section itself will be included  if you wish to include products from sub sections you should also select them  here     Products In These Categories    This part allows you to select product categories for inclusion in the discount  All products in any of the product  categories selected will be included     Any Of These Products  This part allows you to select individual products to include in the discount     Product Multiples    This part of  Requires Products  allows you to specify how many of the qualifying products need to be in the  cart for the discount to become active  If you are using one of the Qualifying Products discount types  you will  need to enter at least 1 for the quantity here  However  you can use this section for offers such as buy one get  one free  The drop down provides the following options     e EXACTLY   This will match the quantity you enter and only that quantity  So  if the customer had more than  the quantity of qualifying products in the cart  the discount would only apply to the quantity entered here   EXACTLY  with multiples    This will match multiples of the quantity you enter  If you were doing a buy  one get one free  you could specify a quantity of 2 and use this option to match 2  4  6  8 etc  products apply  the discount to each group of two    OR MORE   This option al
180. iscounts is separated into two sections  those that give a discount on the goods total and  those that give a discount off the shipping cost  The list also shows you the goods total level or quantity level  that needs to be achieved for the discount to take effect  the customer account types it is applicable to and the  actual discount percentage     Buy One GeT One Free Goods Total    Section Qualifying Products  Discount All Yes    shippingFull Shipping Total Wholesale Yes  Total Special Discounts        Automatic Discounts List    In addition each line has an    Edit    and    Delete    button and a new Automatic Discount can be added by clicking  the    Add New Discount    button at the bottom of the screen     12 9 1 Adding Editing Automatic Discounts    Adding and editing Automatic Discounts uses the same screen  The screen is split into several sections as  follows     General    168    Checkout   Automatic Discounts 169         Buy One GeT One Free  Buy One Nebula  get another one free                             description which can then be used on the discount listing page etc        gscount h  l wl   GoodsTotal          Lel  50    Percent     no    yes   This option does not apply to   offers                     Ono Se          Ono    yes          Ono    yes  General Section of Automatic Discounts Screen    Internal Name    This is an internal name to help you reference the discounts you have setup  It is not normally shown to the  customer     Title  This is the 
181. isplayed if they are not filled in        Subject Subject sec EA  EmailAddress Your Email Address TEXT Eg  cfComments Comments TEXTAREA Eg  Opinion Opinion Of This Site SELECT   Edit      Total Fields   Sort   Reorder Fields    List of contact form fields       4 11 1 Adding Editing Contact Form Fields    Adding and editing contact form fields uses the same screen  However  some of the options are only available  for certain types of fields  Options available are as follows     Type TEXT  Name Email4ddress    Title  our Email Address o i   Size   Maximum Length   validation Ono    yes   Validate For Custom Regex     FYESNO S   O O  validation Message    Visible Ono    ves  Language  Spanish    G SS  eteeeg o    Language  Outlandish  Title  ee  Update Field    Editing a TEXT extra field  showing options already filled in                   37    General Settings   Contact Form Fields 38    Name    This is an internal name that is used in the database  It must be unique and you will be told if it is not  This  field is not generally shown to the customer     Title  This is the description of the field that is shown to the customer in the default templates     Size and Maximum Length  only for TEXT type fields     Size is the actual size of the form field on the page and maximum length is the maximum number of  characters a customer can enter into the field     Columns and Rows  only for TEXTAREA type fields     This is the number of columns and rows that the field should be size
182. itemap should be re generated  If the sitemap is requested and  the currently stored version is older than the number of hours you specify here a new one will be created and  used instead     Generate XML Sitemap    The section at the bottom of the screen allows you to manually re generate your sitemap if you should need  to  Once  Generate Sitemap  is clicked  an information screen will show detailing the progress of the generation  and letting you know when this has finished  You should not close the page before it has completed     4 25 List Settings    This provides some overall control for the front end of your store  regarding lists of products retrieved from  the database  These settings have been included to help restrict excessive queries from the database and to  provide ways of setting exactly how many products will appear in various sections     Of course you could enter very high numbers into these options if you wish to just have everything returned     Maximum Bestsellers To List    Calculate By Number Of Times Ordered ze  Limit Order History Query To days  0   all order history   Product Selection Limit Section Specific  ific i  if you are caching the Bestsellers lists    Maximum Random Products To List    Product Selection Limit Section Specific    Maximum New Products To List   Maximum Top Products To List   Maximum Special Offers To List   Maximum Recommendations To List   Maximum Reviews To List On Product Page  110       Update Settings    Updating variou
183. iting a product category use the same screen  The fields available for product categories are as  follows     Name       Editing a product category    Name  The name of the category  This is purely internal and is not shown to the customer at any point     5 6 Product Flags    Product Flags allows you to create any extra flags you need against products  These are in the format of YES   NO options and are would mainly be used in the templates to display certain things if they are set to YES  the  value to check is actually Y or N in the templates   Once created they become available in the    Product Options     block of the Product Editing Screen     List Of Product Flags    The list of product flags shows you all the current flags you have setup in your store  Each product flag has     Edit    and    Delete    buttons     Descriptive Name    color_Black   Black    color_Red Red ED    preview Preview Only Product ED D  storeavailable Available In Stores Eq  Total Number of Flags  4       List of Product Flags    Adding   Editing A Product Flag    Adding and editing a product flag use the same screen  The fields available for product flags are as follows     storeavailable    Descriptive Name    Available In Stores  Update Flag       Editing a product flag    Name    The name of the flag  It is this name you would use in the templates  e g   product flags storeavailable  in the  above example     Descriptive Name    This is the name for the flag that is shown on the product ed
184. iting screen  You would make this a more intuitive  to describe the flag     70    Contents   Edit Template Product 71    5 7 Edit Template Product    This is another powerful feature of JShop Server s content management  The template product is used as the  basis for every new product you add to your store  When you click the    Add New Product    link from the Content  menu or the    Insert New Product Here    button on the Section Structure screen  the product information screen  that appears will be filled in according to the settings you have used in the template product  The template  product is edited just like any other product within JShop Server     If most or all of your products use the same extra field options  for instance  you can set those up in the  template product and they will already be filled in every time you add a new product  Of course  whilst filling in  field settings for the new product you can remove them if they re not needed for the product you re adding but  the basic reason for using the template product is that many stores sell similar items with similar entries and   hence  using the template product will save time and effort     5 8 Adding Editing Products    Adding and editing products happens on the same screen  There is a lot of product information that can be  stored in JShop Server and product management is very powerful in the system  At first glance the product  information screen can look a little bit overwhelming which is why we ha
185. k Secure Process  HTML     Server Requirements  There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with this gateway     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on the payment gateway   s payment page     Settings Page Details    Skipjack HTML Serial Number  This is your Skipjack ID as given by the payment gateway     Company Name  Text you want to display in the company name on the payment gateway pages     Text Top  Text you want to display at the top of the payment gateway pages     Text Bottom  Text you want to display at the bottom of the payment gateway pages     Page Title  Text you want to display as the page title of the payment gateway pages     Page Background Colour  A HTML color  e g   000000  for the background of the payment pages     Page Text Colour  A HTML color  e g   000000  for the text of the payment pages     Submit Button Text  The text for the submit button on the payment pages     Submit Button Text  The text for the reset button on the payment pages     What Do I Need To Setup At Skipjack     226    Payment Gateways   Gateways 227    You will need to setup the following options in your Skipjack Admin  specifically in Preference   gt  Response  Files     Send Customer to the following WebPages  URLs  Ensure this is selected   Thank you for your order   see the JShop Server settings page for the gateway for the URL   Backend Response URL   see the JShop Server settings page for the gateway for the URL     17 4 28 US
186. kes no stipulation on the unit of measurement of weight that you  use  SO please use what you are comfortable with if you intend to use this field     Tax Rate    Allows you to choose the tax rate for this product  Possible selections are Zero Rate  Standard Rate or Second  Rate  Please see the    Tax Shipping    section of this documentation for more information     Free Shipping  Selecting YES in this field will mean that the product is completely excluded from any quantity  weight or goods  total values used to calculate shipping     Exclude Account Type Discounts    When set to YES any customer account type discounts will not be applied to this product  allowing you to  exempt it from normal discounts  or apply your own product level discounts in the    Advanced Pricing   Combinations    section of the product editing screen    Supplier And Supplier   s Product Code   Here you can select the supplier for this product  should you be using the supplier sub system in JShop Server   along with the supplier   s product code for this product  In addition to setting the product code here you can  also change the supplier   s product code in the Advanced Pricing   Combinations section of the product editing  screen     Supplier Cost    You can also enter an associated supplier cost and the currency that this is in and you can do this here     75    Contents   Adding  Editing Products 76    5 8 2 Extra Fields    This section is where your extra product fields will appear  see the 
187. l but will not be linked to quantity ordered   Minimum   0   Maximum   p    Enter 0 for either to disable the limit   b     Standard Rate      no    yes  gw    Yes    Supplier s Product Code  fapplicable     pd                               73    Contents   Adding  Editing Products 74    General Details Block    Code  SKU     This is your product code for the product  It is optional and can be left blank  however the system won t allow  two products to have the same non blank product code     Name  This is the product s name     SEO URL Title    If entered and you are using Safe URLs with the option to add names to URLs  this text will be used instead of  the product s name field for this text     Short Description  A 250 character short description for the product that you could use to put on a section page that lists many  products     Full Description  An unlimited text field for the full description of the product  This may contain any HTML you wish to use     Search Keywords  An extra field that can be used to contain extra keywords that people might search for when trying to find this  product  For instance  you could include any common misspellings in here     META Description  A specific Meta Tag description field for this product     META Keywords  A specific Meta Tag keywords field for this product     Thumbnail    A thumbnail image for this product  This would normally be shown where the product appears on a section  page  the default templates use this   You have 
188. lds    List of Delivery Address Fields  The list of delivery address fields gives you an overall view of the fields for customers  their internal and  viewable titles along with an    Edit    button and  if the field isn   t one of the standard JShop Server customer  fields  a    Delete    button     At the bottom of this screen there is also an    Add New Field    button along with a select box for the type of field  you would like to add     150    Customers   Delivery Address Fields 151    11 5 1 Adding Editing Delivery Address Fields    Adding and editing delivery address fields uses the same screen  However  some of the options are only  available for certain types of fields  Options available are as follows             TEXT  company    Company Name   Ono    ves    NotBlnk vp  Ono    ves       Maximum Length    Validation       Validate For  Validation Message  Visible  Language  Spanish  Title              Validation Message       Update Field    Editing a Delivery Address field    Name    This is an internal name that is used in the database  It must be unique and you will be told if it is not  This  field is not generally shown to the customer     Title  This is the description of the field that is shown to the customer in the default templates     Size and Maximum Length  only for TEXT type fields     Size is the actual size of the form field on the page and maximum length is the maximum number of  characters a customer can enter into the field     Columns and Rows  
189. le from your computer or choose    Pick File       NOTE  It is much better to upload files using FTP as PHP has an  in built maximum file limit for uploads that your hosting company will set  normally not very large  If your file is  larger than the maximum your PHP setup will allow the file will not upload correctly and you should use FTP     Registration Details   Here you have 3 options for registration information for your digital product  If either    Registration Code    or     Registration Code and Name    are selected you will be prompted to enter registration information on the  dispatch screen  If    None    is selected you will not be required to enter dispatch information for the product     77    Contents   Adding  Editing Products 78    5 8 4 Group Product Settings    ABSS   Silert Frost D   AER 1   Jungle And Clouds  1   AER 2  Volcanic Altermaths  1        Group Product Settings    JShop Server includes the ability for you to create a product made from other products in your store  For  instance you could create a special offer pack that contains several other products  Stock control is handled  across all the grouped products  so all products with stock control activated will be checked and debited as per  normal  You can also include products in a group product that are invisible from your main site should you wish  to     The top box on the left is where you can enter a search string to find products  Clicking the    Search    button will  load the search r
190. livery fields that you cannot delete  some of them  however  can be  made invisible to the customer   In addition to the standard delivery address fields you can also setup  additional delivery address fields  For any extra delivery address fields you can specify if they should be  included when ordering  meaning that they will be saved with the order and the customer will also be asked to  fill them in if adding a new delivery address when ordering     There are 4 field types available  as detailed below     149    Customers   Delivery Address Fields 150    TEXT Single line entry field    TEXTAREA Multiple row entry field  SELECT A select box of options  CHECKBOX Single check box    Each of the fields can be validated and validation messages displayed if they are not filled in        Note  The deliveryCounty field can be changed to a select box if you need to operate tax and   or shipping  against a set list of options  This is done in the General Settings page of the Customer section of the    administration system        List Of Delivery Address Fields    Name Title Type E      deliveryCompany Company Name TEXT       deliveryName Delivery name TEXT  deliveryAddressi Address Line 1 TEXT  deliveryAddress2 Address Line 2 TEXT  deliveryTown Town   City TEXT  deliveryCounty County f State SELECT  deliveryCountry   Country SELECT  deliveryPostcode Postcode Zip TEXT    deliveryTelephone Telephone TEXT    O  2        e_mobile mobile TEST  Total Fields    i       Sort   Reorder Fie
191. ll of these products will be  added to the current section  You will  of course  be taken back to the relevant section once you have selected  products     65    Contents   Adding  Editing Sections 66    You can only add a new section from the Section Structure page  However  there are several places where  Edit buttons are available for sections  Both adding and editing a section use the same screen                               im   a A  ea    I A DS S CG o          We all love the world around us and what better way to celebrate everything that s amazing in natur  by hanging beautiful prints on your walls featuring the best that nature has to offer                          pic or EA   E  Remove Image  upload   Browse  Pik or unt  Em       Remove Image                   Whorl Web Art Store   section html iw       Pick Parent Section                66    Contents   Adding  Editing Sections 67  The General Part Of The Section Editing Screen    Title         This is the section title     SEO URL Title    If entered and you are using Safe URLs with the option to add names to URLs  this text will be used instead of  the section s title field for this text     Short Description  A 250 character short description for the section  You would normally use this where the section appears as a  sub section  the default templates use this      Full Description  An unlimited text field for the full section description that would be shown on the actual section page     META Description  A 
192. lowing you to change it   You can then click    Apply    to save that change     In addition the three little buttons on the right of the content box allow you to move options up and down the  list  changing their display order  or  by clicking the red X  to delete an option completely     4 12 Captcha Settings    This screen allows you to activate the built in support for reCAPTCHA  http    www recaptcha com   to provide  challenges on various forms within JShop Server  Captcha challenges are designed to help distinguish between  robots and humans visiting your site and are useful for stopping spam or unwanted emails     reCAPTCHA is    Carnegie Mellon University    38    General Settings   Captcha Settings 39    reCAPTCHA e    Contact Form  Send To A Friend  Customer Account Signup    Affiliate Account Signup  Product Review  Note  Your templates will require the correct code to show the Captcha     If you do not have this code please refer to the default templates  and include the captcha code in your own templates        Captcha Selection    Captcha to use    Here you can select    No Catpcha    or    reCATPCHA    which is the only captcha system currently supported by  JShop Server  Additional captcha options may become available in the future        Where it should be used    Here you can select which forms or actions in your store will require the visitor to answer a captcha challenge   At the very least we suggest that you do this on the Contact Form and Send To A Fri
193. lows you to specify that the quantity is the minimum and any number above that  can be included in the discount     176    Checkout   Redeemed Codes Report 177    12 12 Redeemed Codes Report    This reports allows you to select date ranges and display a summary giving the total amounts used for each  offer code during that period  It also gives the number of times that the offer code was used     Code   Times Used   Total Redeemed            towels 2   5 72 GBP  we  1   5 00 GBP  Grand Total   10 72 GBP         0 00 USD  70 00 EUR   0 00 CAN    Redeemed Code Report       177    Reports   178    JShop Server includes a comprehensive reports sections that produces a number of different reports covering  products  sections  abandoned carts  orders and customer accounts     13 1 General Options    This screen allows you to set some of the global reporting options     the changes you make here can limit the  reports that are available        Track Product Popularity   O yo    yes  Track Section Popularity    O yo    yes  Track Search Statistics    O yo    yes            General Options    Track Product Popularity     If this is set to YES JShop Server will keep track of how many times people view products  this information is  used for the Product Popularity report  If this is set to NO  no information will be stored for that report     Track Section Popularity   If this is set to YES JShop Server will keep track of how many times people view sections  this information is  used fo
194. ly link to images on  another site     Image Size  To give more information to your affiliates on the banner you can enter the ideal width and height for  displaying it on their site     Description    Informative description to help your affiliates decide which banner to use     Available To Affiliate Groups   With this option you can limit which affiliate groups see this banner as an option in their affiliate administration   You may select more than one group from this list by holding down the CTRL key whilst clicking on them   Selecting the    All    group will make this banner available to the members of all affiliate groups     14 4 Affiliate Fields    JShop Server has a standard set of affiliate account fields although you are free to add  edit or make these  invisible as your needs dictate    There are 4 field types available  as detailed below     185    Affiliates   Affiliate Fields    TEXT    TEXTAREA Multiple row entry field    Single line entry field    SELECT A select box of options    CHECKBOX Single check box    Each of the fields can be validated and validation messages displayed if they are not filled in     List Of Affiliate Fields          Name Title Type      aff_Company  aff_Contact  alt Address   aff_Address2  aff_Town  aff_County  aff_Country  aff_Postcode    aff_Email    aff_Telephone    aff_Fax    aff_ChequeName Make Cheques Payable To TEXT   Edit   Delete    i    Total Fields     Company  Contact Name  Address Line 1  Address Line 2  City Town  Coun
195. m brute force attacks  where an attacker would repeatedly try  logging in to your administration system with different passwords in an attempt to gain access  By using this  option you can only allow a certain number of unsuccessful login attempts before that username is locked out  for a period of time  A block can be reset from the    List of Users    from the administration system     3 7 Viewing Log Files  You can view overall log files  for all users  in date order  with the most recent action first  by clicking on the     View Actions Log File    option on the Users menu     All log actions have a date  time  username  IP address and description of the action  Failed login attempts  if  being logged  will show up in bold to help pick any possible unauthorised login attempts     Total selected entries  2176  Viewing 451   500 EE  cea G       IP Address   Description       03 Nov 2006 19 42 38 administrator 127 0 0 1 Deleted Extra Section Field  morestuff  03 Nov 2006 19 42 15 administrator 127 0 0 1 Added Extra Section Field  morestuff  O3 Nov 2006 19 40 25 administrator 127 0 0 1 Updated Section  Abstract Impressions  O3 Nov 2006 19 39 36 administrator 127 0 0 1 Deleted Language  Gbberish  03 Nov 2006 19 39 27 administrator 127 0 0 1 Deleted Language  German  03 Nov 2006 19 38 55 administrator 127 0 0 1 Deleted Language  French  03 Nov 2006 19 38 40 administrator 127 0 0 1 Added Language  Outlandish    User activity logs give you a view of everything that   s happening 
196. maximum number of  characters a customer can enter into the field     Columns and Rows  only for TEXTAREA type fields   This is the number of columns and rows that the field should be sized to on the contact form page     Validation  Validate For and Validation Message   If you want to make it a requirement that a field is filled in you should select YES for the Validation radio  button  In addition  with the Validate For option  you can select how you want the field validated  There are a  number of built in validation types  such as Not Blank or Email Address and  in addition  choosing    Custom  Regex     allows you to enter a Perl style regular expression for the validation  permitting complex validation  routines to be used  If you are not sure how to use regular expressions or wish to find some for your particular    148    Customers   Customer Fields 149  need a good site is http   regexlib com  where you will find many that you can enter here     Finally the Validation Message is the error message you wish to display if the validation or the field fails and  requires the user to re input information     NOTE  The regular expression validation uses Perl style regular expressions  This has changed in version       2 3 0 from POSIX due to the depreciation of the ereg group of functions in PHP    Include When Ordering    Selecting YES for this option will save any contents of this field with any order the customer places  This isn t a  link to the customer record  the ord
197. ments needed to integrate with InternetSecure     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on InternetSecure   s payment page     Settings Page Details    Merchant Number  This is the account number issued to you by InternetSecure when you signed up for an account with them     Transaction Mode    InternetSecure have 3 transaction modes  Use    Test Mode  Success     to test successful transactions  use    Test  Mode  Failure     to test failed transactions and use    Live Mode    to use your InternetSecure account live     Language  Select the language you wish the payment page to be displayed in     Description  Enter a description for orders passed to InternetSecure     What Do I Need To Setup At InternetSecure     In your InternetSecure administration system you should go to Export Scripts   gt  Export Script Options and set  the following     Server Domain Name   Set this to the domain name of your server     Web Page    Set this to the gateways response internetsecure php URL on your server  e g   http   www yourdomain com gateways response internetsecure php    this will be different on your server and depends on where you installed JShop Server to      Note  InternetSecure will only send a notification if the payment is successful  JShop Server will receive no    notification if payment fails        211    Payment Gateways   Gateways 212    17 4 13 Moneris eSelect Plus Hosted Paypage  Server Requirements    There are no extra server requirem
198. ministrator username and password as    soon as you have installed JShop Server        3 2 List of Groups    This screen shows a list of all the user groups setup in the system  There is a default user group setup called     Administrators    which provides full access to all parts of the system  This user group cannot be deleted  For  other user groups you can click on an    Edit    button or on the group name is take you to the editing page or click  the    Delete    button to remove then group     Administrators    5 Contents And Orders Only Eq D  Total Number of User Groups        List Of User Groups    13    User Management   Adding  Editing a Group 14    3 3 Adding Editing a Group    The group details screen  obtained by clicking    Edit    on the List of Groups or by clicking the    Add New Group    link  on the Users menu  gives you the ability to create a new user permissions group or edit an existing one        Group Name    Contents And Orders Only  Allowed Access For This Group       C  List of User Groups  C  Add New User Group   C  List of Users   C  Add New User   C  Management Options   C  View Actions Log File  C  Clear Actions Log File    C  Company Details   C  Global Options   C  General Settings   C  WYSIWYG Settings   C  Currency Settings    C  Language Settings    C  Extra Product Fields    C  Extra Section Fields    C  Contact Form Fields    C  Search Listing Settings  Editing A Group    Group Name  Enter a name here to describe the group you are addin
199. more information on this  NOTE   With this option on you should ensure that your templates have the  lt BASE gt  tag in them  e g    lt BASE  HREF   shop baseDIR   gt  otherwise images will not appear correctly on the page  You can normally include  this in top html and this will then be included in all pages     If using Safe URLs Append Section Name Or Product Name To URLs  If selected your URLs will include your product and section names  to provide more descriptive URLs     If YES  use the following character to replace spaces and non safe characters    Here you can specify what character should be used to replace non safe URL characters in section names and  product names  My default this is the underscore    _    character but you could also use any other character of  your choosing  If you wish to replace the characters with an empty string  so that nothing appears in their  place  leave this field blank  Be careful which character you choose  however  as some characters will not be  suitable for URLs  Normal usage would include _    or      In addition here you can select to either Remove or Leave duplicate replacements  For instance  if you have  two non safe characters in succession selecting Remove in this option will leave only one replacement  character  e g  this_is rather than this__is    Activate 301 Redirects For Spiders When URL Doesn t Match Selected Format  Again  if you re worried about search engines picking up duplicate contact  you can use this to forc
200. n either upload an image from your local  computer here or pick one that   s already been uploaded     Image Display Dimensions   This specifies how you want the image displayed on the screen  If you only provide one of the options then the  image will be constrained to that size and the other dimension will scale to fit  For example setting    x    to 300  and wv to 0 will lead to the image always being shown 300 pixels wide but will allow the height to change  accordingly  so the image always stays in relative scale     Resize Images At Upload   If you have GD enabled on your PHP installation you can use this option to have images uploaded for this field  automatically resized to the dimensions entered in the option above  This means that the version that   s stored  on the server will be the correct dimensions already  In addition you can get a quality setting that will be used  if the uploaded image is a JPG file     36    General Settings   Contact Form Fields 37    4 11 Contact Form Fields    The contact form  template contactform html  is a page in your store where customers can automatically send  an email to you  This section of the administration system allows you to setup the fields that you would like the  customer to fill in  There are 4 field types available  as detailed below     Single line entry field    TEXTAREA Multiple row entry field  SELECT A select box of options  CHECKBOX Single check box    Each of the fields can be validated and validation messages d
201. n if the customer clicks the    Continue    link at       the bottom of the NoChex payment confirmation page  NoChex only accepts GBP     17 4 17 Optimal Payments API    Server Requirements  You will require your own secure server certificate  SSL  and CURL installed for PHP with secure sockets  support     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on your site     Settings Page Details    Account Number  This is your account number with Optimal Payments    214    Payment Gateways   Gateways 215    Merchant ID  This is your merchant ID with Optimal Payments    Merchant Password  This password will be given to you by Optimal Payments and is automatically generated by them     Server    Here you should choose the test server whilst testing your setup and the live server when you are ready to put  your gateway integration into live more     What Do I Need To Setup At Optimal Payments     You should not need to setup anything at Optimal Payments in order for transactions to be successfully  processed     17 4 18 Paypal  17 4 18 1 Paypal Website Payments Standard    Server Requirements   In order to receive payment status notifications your server will require CURL with SSL support  Sending the  customer to PayPal to make payment and returning them to your order success page does not require any  special server requirements however     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Payment details are taken on PayPal   s payment page     Settings Page Details    A
202. n the postal address details     12 8 Search Gift Certificates    The Search Gift Certificates section on the search panel at the bottom of the screen gives you the ability to  search for gift certificates based on either the Certificate Serial Number  the from name or the to name  In  addition you can specify a particular status for the gift certificate  to filter out only those you want to see  You  do not have to enter anything into the search string if you just want to display all gift certificates of a certain  status     Total selected gift certificates  5  Viewing 1   20             TDSD7ES97E426A47A9374495A26CFSCF gareth joan Email n a   10 00   10 00 pe ated  434034039 1BSCDBED42A609A0C2361A5 me you Email n a   10 00   10 00 SE  87CA4EBS40B6F7SE386D6B41SCOFEF40 gareth me Email nja   20 00   20 00 Activated  6F18C1B79CFSEB73FD82769C7099A71D Gott David Email 27 Sep 2005   20 00   0 00 Expired      63372581FFS0DE3C9FD8212087F931B Brian Holmes Susan Email 27 Sep 2005   10 00   10 00 Expired    Ra       Total Number of Gift Certificates     Typical list of Gift Certificates    The list of gift certificates gives you details of the Certificate Serial Number  which is auto generated when a  gift certificate is created   who it is from  who it is to  the type  expiry details and status  Each line has an    Edit     and a    Delete    button as well     In addition for email gift certificates a button called    Email    will be displayed which  when clicked  allows you to  au
203. n the required setting here     Auto Settle Mode    Here you can choose between manual settling  which means that you have to login to your Realex  administration system to fully process a payment or settling in the next batch  which will automatically process  payments     What Do I Need To Setup At Realex     You should not need to setup anything at Realex in order for transactions to be successfully processed     222    Payment Gateways   Gateways 223    17 4 24 Sage Pay  17 4 24 1 Sage Pay VSP Form    Server Requirements    There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with Sage Pay     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on Sage Pay   s payment page     Settings Page Details    Vendor ID    This is the account number issued to you by Sage Pay when you signed up for an account with them  If you  just wish to test you can use the testvendor Vendor ID     Encryption Password    Again issued by Sage Pay  If you just wish to test you can use the testvendor Encryption Password     Description  Enter a description for the order that will appear on Sage Pay   s payment page     Transaction Mode    Sage Pay provide both a test mode and a live mode  If you are testing with the testvendor details ensure that  you also use    Test Mode    here     Apply AVS CV2 Check    This allows you to fine tune how you want AVS and CV2 checking to be applied to orders  For more  information please refer to Sage Pay   s own integration documentation   
204. nannnnanunnnnnnannnnanannnnnnannnnanannnnanannn nanan 195  Creating New Orders    sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnna 196  Processing Orders   eeekREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEERKKREEEERRKREEEEREKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERKKREEEERKE 196  Dispatching cssseish rosne eee eee 196  Receipt Printing orreee e Eaa a aA E Eaa A AAEE OE 198  Backup 199  Backup Database       c ccceeeteeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseaeeeeeaeaeeeeeaeaeeeeeaeaeeeeeaeaeeeeeaeeeeeeneee 199  Restore Database      eeekREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEERKKREEEERRKREEEERKKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEEKRKREEEEKRKREEEERRE 200  Other Methods for Backup and Restore    sssssssssssunsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnna 200  Payment Gateways 201  Integration with Other Payment Gateways    s ss ssssssssssunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 201  The Use Of CURL osiris irissen ana raaa KAANAA eee 201  Secure Server Requirements e eekREEEERKKREEEERKKREEEERKKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEEREKREEEERKE 201  GateWaysS asccccececeeseecnseeeeneeeeaseeeceeeonseauaaseansegeaaseaeaseeesegeaaseaeeseaaseaeagseaegeeeaaseaeaeseaaeneaas 202   a y A a Bao Le  Tol Sal T a S O A ATT T S 202   17 4 2 Authorize net      sssssssssnsannnnnnnnunnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannannnnnnnnnn nannan nannan nnmnnn nnnann annann anmannan nannan nannan nnmnnn 202   17 4 3 Banque Populaire RTS     sssssssssunsnnnnannnnununnnnunnnnnnunannnnnnunnnnanannnnanannnnanunnnnanannnnanannnnnnann
205. nclude in the discount  Only products that appear in  the section itself will be included  if you wish to include products from sub sections you should also select them  here     Products In These Categories    This part allows you to select product categories for inclusion in the discount  All products in any of the product  categories selected will be included     Any Of These Products  This part allows you to select individual products to include in the discount     Product Multiples    This part of  Requires Products  allows you to specify how many of the qualifying products need to be in the  cart for the discount to become active  If you are using one of the Qualifying Products discount types  you will  need to enter at least 1 for the quantity here  However  you can use this section for offers such as buy one get  one free  The drop down provides the following options     e EXACTLY   This will match the quantity you enter and only that quantity  So  if the customer had more than  the quantity of qualifying products in the cart  the discount would only apply to the quantity entered here   EXACTLY  with multiples    This will match multiples of the quantity you enter  If you were doing a buy  one get one free  you could specify a quantity of 2 and use this option to match 2  4  6  8 etc  products apply  the discount to each group of two    OR MORE   This option allows you to specify that the quantity is the minimum and any number above that  can be included in the discou
206. nel would normally provide the ability to password protect directories     Processing Google Checkout Orders    When an order is placed using Google Checkout on your store  your Orders page will show the Google  Checkout order number on the orders list along with the current financial and fulfillment status of the order at  Google  From the Orders page in JShop Server you can tell Google that you want to process the payment   cancel the order or mark the order as delivered  The options available depend on the current financial and  fulfillment status  Please note that this will not impact your JShop Server order status  which you should  process as normal  When sending processing messages to Google Checkout the financial and fulfillment status  will be updated once JShop Server receives a response     Integration Notes    Please bear the following in mind when using Paypal Express  As it bypasses the normal JShop Server  checkout there are some important things to be aware of     kA      Default shipping prices have to be sent when sending a customer to Google Checkout  These defaults are  used if the merchant calculations facility fails during the customer s checkout  JShop Server uses the  following method to create these default values   1  If a shipping type is available to the default country set  in JShop Server it calculates using this location   2  If it is not available to the default country  JShop Server  picks the first zone used on the shipping type to calculate 
207. ng the    Add New User    link on  the Users menu  gives you the ability to create a new user account or edit an existing one     Note  From version 2 1 1 onwards you can change the administrator username to any desired username  and we recommend you do this for security reasons     Username gareth    Real Name    Show JShop Server Announcements O NO    YES    Login Enabled  Ono    ves    Member OF Administrators    LI contents And Orders Only       Update User    Editing A User    The information required on these screens is as follows  The    Login Enabled    and    Deny    Member Of    options  are not editable for the administrator user  This account always has complete access to the system     Username    This is the actual username for the account  used when logging in  If you are editing an account this field will  not be editable     Password    Here you should enter a password when creating a new user account  When editing an account only enter a  password if you want to change the current user account   s password  If you leave it empty  the password will  not be updated for the account     Real Name  Enter a real name for the account  This is simply to help you identify different accounts     Show JShop Server Announcements  Change this option to enable or disable the built in Jshop Server Announcement system  When active the user  will see a button along the top menu to provide access to the announcements we have made and  if there   s a    new announcement that t
208. nguilla    Counties States In Zone  Available Counties States  Selected Counties States           lt  Back   Update Zone    Editing a shipping zone  Adding and editing zones uses the same screen  The following fields are available     Name  This is an internal name to help you remember what the zone contains     Countries In Zone   On the left you will see a list of all the countries in your store that do not currently have a zone associated with  them  On the right is a list of countries that are in the current zone  obviously if you are adding a new zone this  list will be blank   You can move countries between the two boxes by selecting the countries in one and clicking  the appropriate left or right arrow     97    Taxi Shipping   Shipping Zones 98    Counties   States In Zone   This will only appear if you have opted for the county and deliveryCounty fields to be shown as select boxes  If  this is the case a list of counties states that you have previously entered will appear in the left hand box  and  the counties states selected for this zone in the right hand box  Again you can select counties states and click  the appropriate left or right arrow buttons to move them between boxes     6 9 Shipping Types   Once you have setup your shipping zones you can now enter your shipping types  These are the actual  shipping choices you will make available to your customers when they checkout  For instance you may want to  give the option of First Class Post or Next Day delivery 
209. nnanannnnananan nanan 204   17 4 4 Barclays CPDQ E 204    k   WC CardSa E 206    2 3 0 User Manual   Contents    KE Ree TC UE    17 4 7 ecardon XML  17 4 8 eMS  e services rs                  17 4 9 ebrocessinghktwork  everrEERREEREEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEREEREEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEREEREEEEEEEEEEEEn 208  17 4 10 QOEMer chant  evstsrsrsreseeusEusErsEESEEREEREEEEEEEEREEREEREEREEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEREEEEEEEEEEEEn 209  17 4 11 Google Checkout    ssssssssessusununnnnnnannnnanunnnnunannnnanannnnnnunnnnanannnnunannnnanunnnnanannnnanannnnnnannnnanannnnnnanan nanan 209  17 4 12 InternetSecure     sssssssssssnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannannnnnnnnannnnnan nnna 211  17 4 13 Moneris eSelect Plus Hosted Paypage   sssssssssnsusunnnnunannnnunannnnunununnnnannnnnnannnnnnannnnanannnnnnnnnnnan an 212  17 4 14 Multicards  17 4 15 Multipay          17 4 16 NoChex wesc  17 4 17 Optimal Payments API  KENNT EI  17 4 19 PayPoint      sssssssssunnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnanunnnnnnannnnanunnnnunannnnanannnnanunnnnunannnnanannnnanannnnanannnnanannnnnnannnnanannnnnnanan nanan  17 4 20 PaySystems TPP ProO   sssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnannnnnan nann 219  17 4 21 PSiGate HTML stan ven 220  17 4 22 RBS Worldpay Select Junior    220  17 4 23 Realenx         we 221  17 4 24 Sage Pay ssssssussnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
210. nnnnanannnnananan nanan 101  Suppliers General Settings      ssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nannamamma 101  Suppliers Email Templates       sssssssnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnm nannamamma nnna 102  Supplier  Feld eege ee 104   6 13 1 Adding Editing Supplier Fields     ss sssssssnsnsunnnnnnanunnnnannnnunannnnnnannnnunununnnnanunnnnannnnnnannnnanannnnnnannn nanan 105  ABC Supplier Listing       xkeeEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEERKREEEERRKREEEEREKREEEERRKREEEEERKREEEERRKREEEEEEKREEEERRE 106  Adding  Editing Suppliers            c ccseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeaeae ee keni PENEN aNu FNAN aAA NEn E Ennan 106  Logs 108  General Options          cceseeeeeeeee eee eee 108  LOGS SUIMMALY uu cccseeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeoneeenaaseaneeneeaseaeae KREE KEEN nnmnnn nannan nnana nanmanna 109  LOG Reports uk RREERKREERRKEERRREEREKEEERREEER KREE KEERRREEER KREE KREE nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn KEEN 109  Clear LOGS TTT 111       1997 2010 Whorl Ltd  Reproduction prohibited without permission     Part 8    8 1  8 2  8 3  8 4  8 5  8 6  8 7  8 8  8 9  8 10    8 11      8 12    Part 9  9 1  9 2  9 3  9 4    9 5    9 6    Part 10  10 1  10 2  10 3  10 4  10 5    Templates 112  Email Options anaa EEA ER aAA AAEE E EEE E KREE EREA E 112  Email Templates eiaa a a aAA AAN a Aaaa 113  Template Settings      eeeEREEEERKKREEEERKKREEEEKRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEEERKREEEEREKREEEERRE 116  Installed Template SGets   eeeEREEEERKKREEEEKKKREEEERKKREEE
211. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannannnnnnnnannnnnan nann 223  17 4 25 SecureHosSting    sssssssssssssunnununnnnnnnnannnnannnnnnunannnnanannnnanunnnnanannnnanannnnanannnnanannnnanannnnnnannnnanannnnananan nanan 224  17 4 26 SecureTrading    sssssssssssssunnunununnnnunannnnanunnnnunannnnanannnnnnunnnnanannnnnnannnnanannnnanannnnanannnnnnannnnanannnnananan nanan 225  17 4 27 Skipjack Secure Process  HTML   sssssssssssunununnnnununnnnunannnnunannnnununnnnanannnnanannnnnnannnnanannnnnnannnnnn an 226  17 4 28 USA Pay   sssssssssunsnnunnnnnnnnunnnnanunnnnnnannnnanunnnnunannnnanannnnanunnnnanannnnanannnnanannnnanannnnanannnnnnannnnananan nananana anan 227  17 4 29 UseCasSh   sssssssssusunnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnanunnnnnnannnnannnnnnanannnnanannnnanannnnanannnnanannnnananunnanannnnananannananannanannn nananana anan 227  17 4 30 Verisign   Part 18 Currency Exchange Services 230    18 1 RBS Worldpay   sssccsssssssssssesssssssesssessesssscsesessessracsesecesesravenseressnravenserecsersvensorersersvenserens  230    Index    0       1997 2010 Whorl Ltd  Reproduction prohibited without permission     Introduction   9    JShop Server is a database driven e commerce system designed for servers that support both PHP and  mySQL  Featuring a wealth of features for high end e commerce systems  such as customer accounts  stock  control and order processing  JShop Server is designed for those companies wanting to offer a greater level of  service to their on line customers     Out Of The
212. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannannan nanmanna nannan nananana annan 29  Language Settings        ccccccssseeesseseeeeesnaneeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaseeeaeaaseeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeas 29   4 7 1 Adding Editing a Language       ssssssssssssesssssssesesescessessessnsensenseneneeeeeseesousoeseuseaeeeeseesaesousounansonssnsnes 30  Extra Product Fields       ccccsssseeeessseeeeeseeeeeeesnaeeeseanaaeeeeenaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaseeeaeaaeeeeanaaeeeeas 30   4 8 1 Adding Editing Extra Fields        ssssssssssessesessesescessessesseseesenseneenseneenenousoeseeseaseeeeeesoeeousaenonsenansanes 31   4 8 2 Image Extra Fields     s ssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnununnnnunannnnnnunnnnununnnnunannnnannnnnnanannnnanannnnanunnnnanannnnanannnnannnannanannnnan nnn 32  Extra Section Fields        ccccsssseeeeeneseeeesnseeeeeeeaaeeeeenaaeeeeaeaaeeseaeaaeeeeanaaeeeeanaaeeeeanaaeeeeanaaeeneas 33   4 9 1 Adding Editing Extra Fields      s ssssssussnnunnnnnnunannnnununnnnanannnnanunnnnununnnnanannnnnnunnnnanannnnnnannnnanunnnnanannnnannn n 33   4 9 2 Image Extra Fields     s ssssssussnnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnunannnnunannnnanunnnnanannnnanunnnnanannnnanannnnnnunnnnanannnnanannnnananannanannnnan ann 34  Extra Article Fields       ssccccssssseeesnseeeeeenaaeeeeeeneeeeanaaeeeeseaaseeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeanaaseeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeneas 35   4 10 1 Adding Editing Extra Fields       ssssssssssnusunnnnnnunnnnununnnnunannnnununnnnununnnnanannnnnnunnnnanannnnnnannnnanunnnnanannnnannn n 35   4 10 2 Image Extra Fields      e
213. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nannan 145  Customer Fields     vxeeEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEERKKREEEERKKREEEEREKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEEKRKREEEERRE 147   11 4 1 Adding Editing Customer Fields         sursersressersersrsrsErsEsEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEREEREEREEEEEEEEEn 148  Delivery Address Fields     ss sssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 149   11 5 1 Adding Editing Delivery Address Fields   s sssssssnsusunnnnunannnnununnnnununnnnunannnnanunnnnunannnnanannnnanunnnnnn an 151  Adding  Editing a Customer     ssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnana 153  ABC Customer Listing          cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 154  Date Customer Listing       ssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnna 154  Unmoderated Reviews s  siiseskerinidrnnsu nenn eninsan Nemanau nari neoan i u Nkk ENAN EENNRNN NaN REr   NS AENEA ANEA NRE 154  Reviews by Product      sstxesEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEEKEKREEEERRE 155  Checkout 156  Checkout Settings enseden aeaeaie Na KAE Ean E ANEAN a EEEN Aen 156  Extra Order Fields       eekkEEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEERKKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERKKREEEERRE 156   12 2 1 Adding Editing Extra Order Fields      s sssssssssunununnnnununnnnunannnnunannnnunununnanannnnanannnnnnannnnanannnnnnnnnnnan an 158  Payment Options         ccceeeeeeeseeeeeee
214. nnnnnnnunnnnanunnnnnnannananunnnnanannnnanannnnanunnanunannnnannnnnnannnnnnannnnanannnnnnanan nanan 135  Newsletter 137  Newsletter Options          xkeeEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEKKKKEEEERKKREEEERKKREEEERKKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERKKREEEERRE 137  List Of Newsletters ui eukEEERERRERKREREREEEERERREREREREREEEERERRERERKREREEEERERRERERKREREEEEEERRERERKEEREEEE EEN 138  Adding  Editing Newsletters        eeeekREEEEKKKREEEERKKREEEERKKREEEERKKREEEERKKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERKKREEEERRE 140  Subscribed Emails        c cccssssseeeeeeccecceeeeeeee ee neeeneeeee nee 141  Un Activated Emails       sssssssnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nananana nnna 141    2 3 0 User Manual   Contents    10 6  10 7  10 8    Part 11  11 1  11 2  11 3  11 4    11 5    11 6  11 7  11 8  11 9  11 10    Part 12    12 1  12 2    12 3  12 4    12 5  12 6  12 7  12 8  12 9    12 10  12 11    12 12    Part 13  13 1  13 2  13 3  13 4    Bulk Remove Emails         cc cceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseaaeeeeanaaeeeeaeaeeeeeaeaeeeeeaeaeeeeeaeeeeeeneeee 141  Latest News ou  ccccccseecseeeeneeeeaaeecneeseonseeuaaeeaneeeenaseaeauseengeeeaaseaegeseoaseaeagseaneeseaaseaegesnanesenas 141  Adding  Editing News Items       sssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn a 142  Customers 143  General SettingS E A E E E E 143  Account Types    sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnm nnnm nnna 144  Account Assign Rules       sssssssssssnn
215. nnunnunannnnnnanannanannnnnnunannananannnnannnnananannnnannnnnnanannnnanannanannn nananana na 83  ABC Products Listing   askkeeEERKKREEEEKKKREEEERKKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEEER KREE KREEEERRE 83  Invisible Products Listing  exeekkEeERKKEERERKREEREREREEREREEEEEREREREEEREREREEEREREEEERREREEEERRERKKEEEN 84  Sort Special Oers sessies errour edirenen a errean INCEK NEE EA VEE EERE EKEREN ERNE CEKAN 84  Sort New Products    xeerEekkReSEERKKREEEERKKREEEERKKREEEERKEREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERRERKREEEN 85  Sort Top Products        xkesreRkReSEERKRREEEERKKREEEERKEREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERRERKEEEEN 85  Global Price Change     ssccssseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneseeeaeeesaeeaeneaaeeseeesaeesenesaeeseneaneeaennas 85  Global Option Reset       cccsceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeaenesaeeseeeaaeeseeesaeeseneaaeeseneaneesenoas 85  fad ei ER 86   5 16 1 Article BrOWSER   sssssssssnnununnnnnnununnnnunannnnanunnunannnnnnanannanannnnnnanannananannnnannnnananannnnannnnananannnnanannananan nanan anna 86   5 16 2 Adding Editing Articles     ssssssussusussnnnnnnunnunannnnnnannnnananunnnnunnnnunannnnnnannnnnnunannnnannnnanannnnnnanannanannnnnnanan na 87   5 16 3 ABC Articles Listing    sssssssssnsusunnnnunnnnnnununnunnnnnnunannnnanannnnnnanannunanunnnnannnnananannanannnnnnanannnnanannanannnnnnanan na 90   5 16 4 Invisible Articles Listing  sevsrrsrsEsESEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEREEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
216. nt     172    Checkout   Offer Code Settings 173    12 10 Offer Code Settings    JShop Server includes an offer code system that allows you to setup discount offer codes that can be entered  on the payment step of your store   s checkout to receive a discount against the total cost of the order        Enable Offer Codes  O yo    yes       Offer Code Settings  This screen allows you to set some of the offer code system options  Options available are     Enable Offer Codes    If this is set to NO  offer codes will not be available for redemption in your store  Set this option to YES if you  would like to activate the offer code system     12 11 List of Offer Codes    Offer codes allow you to setup discounts that require the entry of a special code to redeem them  They can  also be based upon a number of criteria  including products in the cart  These discounts can take several  forms  including goods total and shipping total discounts or cheapest product free etc  For instance  setting up  an offer code that gives a 100  discount off the shipping cost when the goods in the cart total more than 100  GBP would equate to free shipping     Offer codes are shown as a separate line in the cart and at checkout  giving the total amount of all the  discounts that are applicable to the order        Total selected offer codes  3  Viewing         fulltest Goods Total         me Goods Total All No   5 00  offer1 Goods Total All Yes   5 00       Total Number of Offer Codes     Typical list o
217. nt Assign Rules    In addition the    Sort   Reorder Rules Order    allows you to change the order in which the rules are applied  So   you should put the least restrictive rules first  and the most restrictive rules last  The last matched rule will  dictate how the customer is treated     Adding   Editing Account Assign Rules    Adding and editing account assign rules use the same screen     145    Customers   Account Assign Rules 146    Set Default Z No Change v  Ono    yes                      Assign Account Type  Assign Tax Exempt    Only IF Country Equals    Turkey   Turkmenistan   Turks And Caicos Islands  Tuvalu   Uganda    Ukraine   United Arab Emirates  United Kingdom   United States   United States Minor Outlyi             If Field Match  e Retailer      Equa w   AND IF Field Match   AND If Field Match     AND If Field Match  DO O  AND If Field Match  Lo   Update Rule          Editing an Existing Account Assign Rule    Name  This is an internal name only that helps you identify different rules in the administration system     Assign Account Type  Here you can select what account type a customer should be given that matches this rule  You can select    Set  Default   No Change    if you don   t wish to change their customer account type     Assign Tax Exempt   If set to YES then the customer will not have tax charged  This could be used  for instance  if you   re selling  across Europe as customers with valid VAT numbers from a different European country usually don 
218. nt to  For instance   if you don   t enter an alternative language version of a product description  JShop Server will  instead  show the  default language description  This enables you to setup languages as you go along  gradually entering  alternative language versions of text     Not only can products and sections be multi language but also product options  field titles  payment methods  and shipping methods  In addition the native language versions of product information are stored with orders   enabling you to send native language emails to your customers     mi Name Visible   Action  Y Eq    1 English          22 Spanish ty  27 Outlandish N BEE          Total Languages     List of languages    Finally  all text on the templates is displayed using Labels and Snippets  These are discussed in more detail in  the Templates section of this documentation  But it means that absolutely everything on your store can be  made fully multi language     Default Language    English v   for    Changing The Default Language       The bar at the bottom of this screen allows you to change the default language  When a visitor first arrives at  your store this will be the language they initially see all prices in     Note  Once you have setup a new language you will see new fields that can be filled in on many sections of    the administration system  These allow you to enter the alternative language versions for fields that this  can be used on        29    General Settings   Language Sett
219. o certain customer  account types and either add a percentage or a fixed price to the overall price of the item     Note  On the front end of your store products with options cannot be added from anywhere other than  from the actual product page itself  i e  not from the product listed on a section  You can include an    add to  cart    button on the section page for the product but the customer will be forwarded directly to the  product page rather than the product automatically being added to the basket     Note  On the front end product pages  the price fields will dynamically update  if the user has Javascript  enabled  when options are chosen that change the product s price  This gives the customer an instant  update on the total price for the product        The fields available for each option are     New  This is where you enter the option   s text that will be shown to the customer     Option Visible   You can make options temporarily invisible in the store by unchecking this option  The option will then appear  in the option list  on the right  in grey  rather than black  giving you a visual indication of which options are  visible     76    Contents   Adding  Editing Products 77    Account Types  If you wish to limit the option to only being available for a certain customer account type then select the  account type here  Selecting    All    will make it available for everybody     Percent or Prices   If you want the option to impact on the price of a product then y
220. o not delete any currencies that you no longer wish to use     simply set them to Visible   NO     The reason for this is that many parts of the JShop Server system reply upon the currency information  stored here and past orders will not show prices formatted correctly if the currency is missing        28    General Settings   Currency Settings 29    4 6 2 Live Exchange Rate Service    JShop Server includes the ability to use a live exchange rate service to automatically retrieve and use up to  date exchange rates every day for your store     Note  Currently only Worldpay   s exchange service is supported which requires a Worldpay account  Other  exchange rate services will be added in future updates as required           Live Exchange Rate Service Change Service    If you do not have an exchange rate service account with one of the above  companies you should choose    Off        Selecting A Live Exchange Service     You can select the exchange rate service you wish to use from the drop down  or select Off to turn this feature  off   Click the    Change Service    button and you will be taken to the settings screen for the service you have  chosen     Please see the    Currency Exchange Services    section for details on setting up your chosen service     4 7 Language Settings    JShop Server is fully multi language and you can setup as many languages as you want to use  In addition  there is no need to enter everything in all the languages you wish to show if you do not wa
221. ode  that never expires     Allow Multiple Use By Same Person    If set to NO the system will attempt to deny a customer using an offer code more than once  however  no  system is full proof in this regard  JShop Server uses checks on customer accounts  cookies and email  addresses to try to limit a customer to a single use if this option is set to YES     Only Allow If Goods Total  gt     Here you can specify that the discount should only become available if the goods total in the cart  before  discounts  is greater than the amounts you enter here     Only Allow If Total Quantity  gt     Here you can specify that the discount should only become available if the total number of products in the cart  is above the give nvalue     Account Types  This box allows you to select the customer account types that the discount is applicable to     All    literally means    all accounts  You may select any combination of account types by clicking on the account type names whilst  holding the Shift or CTRL key     Requires Products    175    Checkout   List of Offer Codes 176    Whorl Web Art Store  gt  Space  gt  Stars And Nebulea          l  General  _  Specials       First Rate  _  Offer Test 1    Search Geer  NEB3   Rainbow Nebulea  NEB6   Sepia Nebulea  NEB7   Purple Swirl Galazy        Requires a quantity of EXACTLY  with multiples        qualifying products in the cart     Ensure that this is at least 1 if you are limiting to products    Requires Products Section of the Automatic D
222. oduct code  product name etc  will cause the    export file to include a line for each of the order lines  These lines will all contain the same basic order  header information        Export Products    Export screen that provides access to all the products in your store     Note  Only those currencies that are not calculated by exchange rates can be exported     Export Customers    Export screen that provides access to all the customers from your store     Export Stock Levels  Export screen that provides access to just the product stock level fields  This is useful for creating an export    that can then be updated in a spreadsheet on your PC and imported again using the    Update Stock Levels     import option     Export Affiliates    Export screen that provides access to all the affiliates in your store     Export Sections    Export screen that provides access to all the sections currently setup in your store     9 6 Quickbooks Menu    JShop Server provides an order export in Quickbooks IIF format for importing into the Quickbooks accounting  software  Currently this export supports the United Kingdom  United States and Australian versions of  Quickbooks and it   s important that you select the correct version on the Quickbooks Settings screen for the  export to work correctly     In addition import errors into Quickbooks can be caused by choosing incorrect account settings on the    133    Import Export   Quickbooks Menu 134    Quickbooks Settings screen so you should be 
223. oducts Report showing store products in order of the number of times  they appear in orders  Grouped by product code name    New Customer Accounts Report showing the total number of customer accounts opened     Each report is grouped by a certain type of record  for instance the Product Popularity report is grouped by  product code name which means that all occurrences of a product are grouped into one record with a total   The reports then show the results grouped by the total for each of the types of record  in descending order      0 ll ll      10 v                  Date From   Date To   Group By          Include Account Type     Limit Result Lines        Selection And Sorting Options For Reports    By using the Date From and Date To section of the screen you can restrict the date range you want the  reports to cover and in addition select a primary grouping for the reports  to help split the report up even  further  For instance  should you select Month as the grouping  the report will show totals for occurrences by  month and not for the total in the database  This is useful for reports such as the Total Orders report as it  allows you to show breakdown totals for particular periods  right down to individual days     181    Affiliates   182    With version 1 2 0 of JShop Server we introduced the built in affiliate system  This provides you with the ability  to run your own Affiliate system  including 2nd tier commissions if you wish to  directly from your store with no  
224. ogle Checkout merchant key    Button Size    209    Payment Gateways   Gateways 210  Select the size of the Google Checkout button you would like to display on your site     Button Style  Select the style of the Google Checkout button you would like to display on your site     Merchant Location    Select your country  Please note that Google Checkout only supports merchants from the United Kingdom or  the US     County State Cross Reference   As Google Checkout allows free text entry of counties outside the US  and a pre defined list of 2 letter US state  abbreviations  here you can provide alternative spelling versions to match what comes from back from Google  Checkout  This only applies if you are displaying County States as a select box in JShop Server     What Do I Need To Setup At Google     Within your Google Checkout account  either Sandbox or Live   login and go to Settings   gt  Integration  Here  you will find your Merchant ID and Key  Ensure that  My company will only post digitally signed carts  is checked  and that  Notification as XML    is selected  In  API callback URL    enter the URL shown on the settings page for  Google Checkout in JShop Server  Set the API version number to 2 2     What Else do I Need to Setup for JShop Server     You will need to implement an htaccess username and password on the gateways googlecheckout directory   This should use your Google Checkout Merchant ID as the username and Merchant Key as the password  Your  hosting control pa
225. on   General Eg  High Profile Eg Delete  Total Number of Affiliate Groups   The List Of Affiliate Groups          The General group  although it can have its name changed  cannot be deleted as this is the default group in  JShop Server     Along with each of the groups is an    Edit    button to edit the group   s details and a    Delete    button to remove the  group from the system     Adding   Editing Affiliate Groups    Adding and editing affiliate groups uses the same screen  The following fields are available for affiliate groups     183    Affiliates   Affiliate Groups 184           Update Group    Editing an existing Affiliate Group           Base Commission       2nd Tier Commission  if activated         Name  This is the internal name for the affiliate group     Base Commission    This is the commission orders that have come through an affiliate that is a member of this group will attract  It  can either be a percentage or a flat rate in the base currency for your store     2nd Tier Commission    If the 2nd Tier Commission function of the affiliate system is activated  this is the commission the original  affiliate will attract  It can either be a percentage or a flat rate in the base currency for your store     14 3 Affiliate Banners    You can provide your affiliates with any number of banners you would like them to use to link through to your  site and you can even limit which affiliates have access to which banners through their affiliate administration     List
226. only for TEXTAREA type fields     This is the number of columns and rows that the field should be sized to on the contact form page     Validation  Validate For and Validation Message    If you want to make it a requirement that a field is filled in you should select YES for the Validation radio  button  In addition  with the Validate For option  you can select how you want the field validated  There are a  number of built in validation types  such as Not Blank or Email Address and  in addition  choosing    Custom  Regex     allows you to enter a Perl style regular expression for the validation  permitting complex validation  routines to be used  If you are not sure how to use regular expressions or wish to find some for your particular  need a good site is http   regexlib com  where you will find many that you can enter here     Finally the Validation Message is the error message you wish to display if the validation or the field fails and  requires the user to re input information     NOTE  The regular expression validation uses Perl style regular expressions  This has changed in version       2 3 0 from POSIX due to the depreciation of the ereg group of functions in PHP    151    Customers   Delivery Address Fields 152    Include When Ordering   Selecting YES for this option will save any contents of this field with any order the customer places  This isn t a  link to the customer record  the order will contain the data that the user  or internally  see below  had in this 
227. ons     Default Check 2 way Links For Associated Products   If you wish the product editing screen to have the 2 way link checkbox when adding associated products  unchecked by default  so only create 1 way links  e g  from the product to the associated product and not in  reverse  then set this to NO  Alternatively set this to YES to have the box checked by default     41    General Settings   Meta Tag Details 42    4 15 Meta Tag Details    Although JShop Server contains product and section specific Meta Tag options  this section allows you to setup  Meta Tags that will be used by other pages     horl  rt Demonstration Store For JShop Server  jshop  server  professional  mysql  php  e commerce    LJ Always use these  ignore products   sections Meta Tag settings    Update Meta Tag Details       Meta Tag Details  The fields available on this screen are as follows     Author Name  This is the author field Meta Tag details    Description    This is the description field Meta Tag  Many search engines use this as the description that   s shown on the  search results page     Keywords OT  This is the keywords field Meta Tag     Always use these  ignore products   sections Meta Tag settings    Selecting this checkbox option will mean that the author  description and keywords Meta Tags you enter on this  screen will be used on all pages and any entered for particular products or sections will not be used     Note  You could opt to remove the Meta Tag fields from the templates complet
228. op Server has a standard set of customer fields that you cannot delete  some of them  however  can be  made invisible to the customer   In addition to the standard customer fields you can also setup additional    147    customer fields  These customer fields do not necessarily have to be editable by the customer     in fact there  are a number of options that give you control over who fills them in  the customer  or you   whether they have  to be completed when ordering  for instance  if somebody orders from your site with no account  and whether    they are to be included in the order details available in the Order Management system     There are 4 field types available  as detailed below     Single line entry field    TEXTAREA Multiple row entry field  SELECT A select box of options  CHECKBOX Single check box    Each of the fields can be validated and validation messages displayed if they are not filled in        Note  The county field can be changed to a select box if you need to operate tax and   or shipping against    a set list of options  This is done in the General Settings page of the Customer section of the       administration system     List Of Customer Fields    Name Title Type      company Company Name TEXT       title Title SELECT  forename Forename TEXT  surname Surname TEXT    address  Address Line 1 TEXT  address2 Address Line 2 TEXT  town Town   City TEXT  county County   State SELECT  country Country SELECT  postcode Postcode f Zip TEXT  telephone Telephon
229. or small value items      6 5 Country Level Tax    This is where you setup the country level tax rates  For instance in Europe VAT is a country level tax rate and  this would be setup in here  However  if your company operates from a number of different countries you can  setup different tax rates from these screens     ID Country    73 France 0  EE    80 Germany 0  Eq Delet  105 Italy oe  EBD ESS  171 Portugal 0  Baga    197 Spain o EN GSS  203 Sweden o ED ESS  222 United Kingdom oe  EN GES    Total Taxed Countries        Extract of Country Tax Rates Screen    Each one has an    Edit    and    Delete    button and in addition there is an    Add New Tax Rate    button at the bottom  of the list to create a new tax rate against a country     Adding   Editing Tax Rates    United Kingdom    Standard Tax Rate Yo    Second Tax Rate Po   et   Update Tax Rate    The Add Edit Tax Rate Screen       Country  This is the visible display name of the country  When editing a tax rate this cannot be changed  when created a  tax rate this will be shown in a drop down box for you to pick the applicable country     Standard Tax Rate  This is the standard tax rate you would like to charge for this country     Second Tax Rate  This is the second  normally reduced if applicable to your country  that you want to charge for this country     6 6 County State Level Tax    In addition to the country tax you can specify a county state level tax  The way this works is that JShop Server  first sees if th
230. ossibilities are     e    Credit        The affiliate account is credited with the transaction amount   e    Debit        The affiliate account is debited with the transaction amount  this is useful for refunded orders etc    e    Payment        A payment transaction is created     Amount  This is the amount of the transaction in the base currency of your store     Transaction Status    Affiliates only see Authorized transactions and this select box allows you to change the status of the  transaction  Options are Authorized and    Un Authorized        14 8 Transactions  Transactions  All    This shows a list of all affiliate transactions in date order with the newest first     190    22 Sep 2004  11 46 02   22 Sep 2004  11 45 09   07 Nov 2003  00 38 30   07jNov 2003  00 38 30   07 Nov 2003  00 36 57   07j Nov 2003  00 36 57   06 Nov 2003  19 42 11   06 Nov 2003  19 42 11   06jNov 2003  19 40 35   06 Nov 2003  19 33 15   06 Nov 2003  19 32 53   12 Sep 2003  22 48 58   12 Sep 2003  22 43 54   12 Sep 2003  22 41 38   12 Sep 2003  14 19 20   12 Sep 2003  14 16 58   12 Sep 2003  12 44 22     Total Number of Transactions     Affiliates   Transactions    Whorl Ltd   whorl   Maya Ltd   maya   Whorl Ltd   whorl   Maya Ltd   maya   Whorl Ltd   whorl   Maya Ltd   maya   Whorl Ltd   whorl   Maya Ltd   maya   Whorl Ltd   whorl   Whorl Ltd   whorl   Whorl Ltd   whorl   Wiel Ltd   whorl   Whorl Ltd   whorl   Whorl Ltd   whorl   Whorl Ltd   whorl   Whorl Ltd   whorl   Whorl Ltd   whorl     1
231. ou should enter either a percentage difference  here  percentages can also be minus  if you wish to remove a percentage from the price  or a flat rate price  that will be added  or taken away in the case of a minus price  from the overall price for the product     Clicking    Add    will add the current field settings as a new option  If you click on an already existing option in the  list on the right an    Apply    button will also appear that you should click once you have finished updating the  option   s settings     The right box also has up and down arrows that can be used to change the display order of the options and a  red X to delete a selected option from the list     In addition to the pricing options available for individual selections in extra fields  please see the    Advanced  Pricing   Combinations    section for further product pricing options     5 8 3 Digital Download Options                no Ows    wa T    Pick File     Perie     NOTE  PHP has a maximum file upload limi that will be set by your ISP   Alternatively upload via  FTP and use    Pick File          v                   None       Digital Download Options    This section offers settings for digital download products  Here you can specify the digital file and registration  information     Is Digital Product   Set to YES if the product is a digital product     Digital File OT  This is where you choose the actual digital download file for the product  You can either    Browse       to upload a  fi
232. ou to enter a list of options for a select box field  You can enter a new option by typing it in the  Option  box and either pressing return or clicking the    Add    button     If you select an already entered option its contents will appear in the Option  box allowing you to change it   You can then click    Apply    to save that change     In addition the three little buttons on the right of the content box allow you to move items up and down the list   changing their display order  or  by clicking the red X  to delete an item completely     14 5 Adding  Editing an Affiliate    Adding and editing an affiliate uses the same screen  You can add a new affiliate by clicking the    Add New  Affiliate    menu option and edit a customer from the affiliate listing   search pages     When editing an affiliate for any that have 2nd tier affiliates you will see a link providing access to a list of  those affiliates  In addition if the affiliate you are editing is a 2nd tier affiliate a link will be provided to the  parent affiliate            Username   Password   E    Company  Contact Name  Address Line 1  Address Line 2 fd  City Town  County State  Country  Postcode Zip   Email  Telephone   Fax   Make Cheques Payable To   Affiliate Group   Status     lt  Back   Update Affiliate    Editing an existing affiliate account  The fields shown on this screen are those from the    Affiliate Fields    setting page plus the following     Username  This is the affiliate   s username that they 
233. ount becomes active  select it here  This allows you to setup  discounts to come into effect in the future     Expires  Here you can specify that the discount should expire on the given date  or select No to create a discount that  never expires     Only Allow If Goods Total  gt     Here you can specify that the discount should only become available if the goods total in the cart  before  discounts  is greater than the amounts you enter here     Only Allow If Total Quantity  gt     Here you can specify that the discount should only become available if the total number of products in the cart  is above the give nvalue     Account Types  This box allows you to select the customer account types that the discount is applicable to     All    literally means    all accounts  You may select any combination of account types by clicking on the account type names whilst  holding the Shift or CTRL key     Requires Products    171    Checkout   Automatic Discounts 172    Whorl Web Art Store  gt  Space  gt  Stars And Nebulea          l  General  _  Specials       First Rate  _  Offer Test 1    Search Geer  NEB3   Rainbow Nebulea  NEB6   Sepia Nebulea  NEB7   Purple Swirl Galazy        Requires a quantity of EXACTLY  with multiples        qualifying products in the cart     Ensure that this is at least 1 if you are limiting to products    Requires Products Section of the Automatic Discounts Screen    Products In These Sections    This section allows you to pick which sections you wish to i
234. out     Log Cart Creation  amp  Checks   If you need to track dropped carts or find out if there are options you are using above that are causing carts to  be dropped or copied please use this option and specify a filename  The log file created is a simple CSV  detailing     24    General Settings   Cart Sessions  amp  Security Settings 25       CartID  User Agent Referrer IP Address Status New CartID  if applicable     NOTE  This should be used for debugging only and should not be left activated as it will create a very large    log file if run for prolonged periods  Under normal circumstances you would not need to activate this        4 4 General Settings    This screen contains some general display settings that are applicable to the whole of JShop Server     d    M AY    Format Options    d Day of month  2 digits   D Day of week  e g  Fri   m Month  2 digits   M Month  2 letter text  e g  Mar  F Text month  e g  March   y Year  2 digits  e g  03   Y Year  4 digits  e g  2003  Other characters shown as entered  Format Options    H Hour  24 hour Format    h Hour  12 hour Format    i Minutes   s Seconds   a Lowercase    am  or  pm       Uppercase    AM or Dh   Other characters shown as entered    Convert Line Breaks To  lt br  gt   on Products and Section Fields   no O ves    Update Settings       General Settings    Date Format   You can specify how you would like dates to be shown in both the administration system and the front end by  changing the format string here  An e
235. outputs any content that they may have  However  sometimes you may  want to display one or two extra fields in a different way and by checking this to YES you can remove them  from that default loop in the templates and display them elsewhere on the page where you want to     4 9 2 Image Extra Fields  There are many additional fields available for the IMAGE type of extra field     IMAGE    Exclude From Loop GO vo O ves    Default Image   Upload     Poor      O     C  Remove Image    Image Display Dimensions   x  yi  Leave either x or y blank to only scale by one dimension   Resize Images   t Upload   O wo    yes If JPG  use this quality setting   100  best       Language  Spanish    Usi    Language  Outlandish  Te Cd  Update Field       Editing an IMAGE extra field    Default Image   This allows you to select a default image that will be shown on a section page if no section specific image has  been uploaded for this field via the section editing screen  You can either upload an image from your local  computer here or pick one that   s already been uploaded     Image Display Dimensions   This specifies how you want the image displayed on the screen  If you only provide one of the options then the  image will be constrained to that size and the other dimension will scale to fit  For example setting    x    to 300  and wv to 0 will lead to the image always being shown 300 pixels wide but will allow the height to change  accordingly  so the image always stays in relative scale  
236. p valid for  600    _  minute s   Cache Recommended Products      yo    YES  Keep valid for  600    _  minute s   Ono    ves     The rootsections loop is used For the main section navigation  JShop Server will automatically handle cache validity     Cache Directory    Cache Options    Cache Labels    Cache Bestsellers    Cache Rootsections           Cache Settings    Cache Directory    This simply outputs the setting you have in your static config php file which specifies the current location of the  cache on your server     Cache Options   Options are the main configuration settings for your store and these are retrieved from the database on every  page load  However  you can cache these so that the query is not run on every page load  This is only really  recommended once a store is setup and options won t change option  However  JShop Server handles the  refreshing of the options cache automatically  so if you change an option  JShop Server will re build the cache  for you     Cache Labels    Labels cover much of the text that the customer sees on the front end of your store and again  these are  retrieved from the database for each page load  In many situations in makes sense to cache these  especially if  you have multiple languages  to reduce the queries required on the database  JShop Server will automatically  re build the cache if this is enabled when labels are changed     Cache Bestsellers   The bestsellers list is  by default  shown on every single page in JShop S
237. products or sections they ve already looked at in your store     Product History To Store  The maximum number of products to retain in the Recently Viewed product history for a customer     Section History To Store  The maximum number of sections to retain in the Recently Viewed section history for a customer     4 31 Users Online Settings    This simple feature lets you include on your shop   s pages an indication of how many other people are currently  on your site     If you have this option set to YES  you will also see the users online statistics below the Update Settings button  so you can view details in the admin system     Activate Users Online Feature O NO     YES    Time Limit For Calculation    d Reset Most Ever Users Online Figures    Update Settings  Current Users Online    There are 0 users online currently  The most ever was 5 users on 20 Nov 2006       Users Online Settings    Activate Users Online Feature    When set to YES JShop Server will start tracking the number of users online on your site which you can then  display via  the templates for your store     Time Limit For Calculation    This allows you to set the length of time in minutes that   s used to determine how many people online  For  instance a value of 60 will include everybody that   s been active on line for the last hour and a value of 10 will  only include those that have been active on line in the last 10 minutes     Reset Most Ever Users Online Figures    If checked  when    Update Settin
238. quential ID  this sorts using that    Default Template For Sub Articles When Created   Here you can specify what template any sub articles should be set to use when they are created  By using this  option you can ensure that sub articles use a consistent theme without having to think about setting the  template manually for each one     Exclude From Breadcrumb    Sometimes you will want to use an article as a container for other articles but won t necessarily want it to  appear in the breadcrumb  If so set this option to YES  The Top Links collection in a fresh installation of JShop  Server has this set to YES  for example     Depth Retrieve  for Navigation     This is primarily for advanced template editing where you want to create template code to not only show sub   articles but also sub sub articles etc  if you re created a complex navigation where you want multiple levels  shown on the same templates     Creation Date Time  Primarily useful if you re sorting articles by Creation Time  This can be changed after the article is created     Exclude From Sitemap  If you do not wish this article to appear in the sitemap select NO here  otherwise select YES     89    Contents   Articles 90    5 16 2 3 RSS Feed Options    JShop Server can automatically create RSS feeds from articles and sub articles and this section of the article  editing screen allows you to set those options     Please note that RSS feeds can only be created for articles that are available to customer account
239. r  both        Done A  JShop Server Built In CSS Editor    The CSS Editor may look daunting at first but actually it   s pretty easy to follow  On the left hand side of the  screen you ll see a list of all the CSS selectors within the CSS file you re editing  If you re editing a CSS file  designed with JShop Server s CSS editor in mind you ll see headings  helping to split up the various selectors  to help guide your way around them  In addition you ll also see blue help buttons and  if you put your mouse  over these  you ll get some more explanation about what that selector does  The default templates for version  2 2 0 include help on all the selectors     If you click on a selector on the left  this will load up the selector   s style options in the right hand pane  This  part of the screen is split into the following sections     119    Templates   Edit CSS File 120    Colours     The basic colours for the selector  so here you can set background colours and foreground  text   colours    Font Styling     This is where you can change the font settings for the selector    Padding     This is where you can change the padding around the selector  so for instance you could change  the padding around each link you have on your site    Margins     Similar to padding  margins provide you with a way of increasing or decreasing spacing around  an element that uses the selector    e Borders     Here you can set the different borders you would like elements using the selector to have
240. r an account with them     Channel ID  lt currency gt     For each currency you are allowing people to check out in you will need to enter the corresponding channel ID  in the appropriate box     User ID  This is the user ID issued to you by the gateway when you signed up for an account with them     207    Payment Gateways   Gateways 208    User Password  This is the user password you have setup with the gateway for transactions     Transaction Mode  ecardon provide both a test mode and a live mode     Payment Usage  A free text description that will appear on the customer s credit card bill     What Do I Need To Setup At ecardon     There is nothing that you need to setup at eMS     17 4 8 eMS  e services rs     Server Requirements  There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with eMS     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on eMS s payment page     Settings Page Details    Username  This is the username issued to you by eMS when you signed up for an account with them     Password  This is the transaction password issued to you by eMS     Store ID  This is the Store ID issued to you by eMS    Order Description  A free text field to describe the order on the eMS payment pages    What Do I Need To Setup At eMS     There is nothing that you need to setup at eMS     17 4 9 eProcessingNetwork    Server Requirements  There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with eProcessingNetwork     Where Are Credit Card Details T
241. r jobs on a timed basis     Note  We cannot support custom PHP scripts used for automated jobs  However  please see the Extending  JShop Server section of this manual for more information     Clear Logs    Clear Carts    Optimize Database    Clear Cache  Total Jobs   List of Automated Jobs       From the main jobs list you can add  edit or delete automated jobs     47    General Settings   Automated Jobs 48    4 21 1 Adding Editing Automated Jobs    Adding and editing automated jobs use the same screen     Name Clear Carts  JobToRun    Cart Pruning v    Custom en Path From Main ana    Active Ono    ves    Day of Week     if anything other than    Any      is selected this will  override selection made for Day of Month option below     Day of Month    Hour 21 v       Minute 25 w          Update Job    Automated Job Editing Screen    Name  This is a name you d like to give your job to help you identify it on the main automated jobs list     Job To Run  There are a number of built in jobs  as follows     Log Pruning     This job will automatically remove log data according to the amount of history you want kept   set in the Logs section of the administration system    Cart Pruning     This job will automatically remove old cart data according to the amount of history you want  kept  set in General   gt  Global Settings    Optimize Database     This job will run mySQL optimization on your database to ensure it   s kept as fast as  possible    e Clear Cache   If you re using the c
242. r the Section Popularity report  If this is set to NO  no information will be stored for that report     Track Search Statistics     If this is set to YES JShop Server will track search terms used in the search facility of your store  It will also  track the average number of products and sections returned for each of the search terms     13 2 Reports Summary          Reports Summary    This screen gives a general overview of your store including the total number of products  sections  product  views  outstanding carts  the number of products in those outstanding carts  orders and customer account  totals     178    Reports   Clear Report Data 179    13 3 Clear Report Data    This screen allows you to periodically clear some of the data that JShop Professional stores for the reports     Clear Popularity Records Up To And Including 2007 v       Clear Popularity Data Now          Clear Abandoned Carts Up To And Including    Clear Abandoned Carts Now    Clear Search Statistics Up To And Including            Clear Search Statistics Now       Clear Report Data    Clear Popularity Records Up To And Including    Clicking on the    Clear Popularity Data Now    will remove any popularity data for products and sections before  and including the selected date  Obviously tracking data can build up to be quite large  especially on busy sites   so this should be done regularly to keep the data manageable     Clear Abandoned Carts Up To And Including    Clicking on the    Clear Abandoned Ca
243. rack options only    if you want to track stock on options but ignore the main stock level   If you choose this last option you can ignore the Stock Level setting below     Note  This will have no effect if the global stock control setting is not on  please see the    General    section    of the documentation        Stock Level  This is your actual stock level for the product     Warning Level  The stock control system in JShop Server allows you to send emails when a product s stock falls below the  warning level  to give you an advanced warning that you may have stock problems with a product soon     Action on Zero   This tells JShop Server what it is to do when the product s stock reaches zero  There are two options     Leave Available  with purchase   This leaves the product visible and purchasable in your store  If you  wanted to show the product but not allow a customer to add it to their basket you would use this option and  use an if statement in the template to see if the stock was above zero  If it was you would show the add to  cart button  otherwise you could hide it    Leave Available  no purchase   This leaves the product visible but cannot be purchased  Any attempt to  add the product to the basket will result in the customer receiving an out of stock message on the cart  template    Hide  JShop Server will not send the product to the templates at all if the stock level reaches zero     80    Contents   Adding  Editing Products 81    5 8 7 Product Options      
244. ration Notes    216    Payment Gateways   Gateways 217    Please bear the following in mind when using Paypal Express  As it bypasses the normal JShop Server  checkout there are some important things to be aware of     1  When using their live shipping rate update service  which JShop Server does  the software has to provide  Paypal with a maximum value for the order which cannot be breached  This is really quite awkward as it s  not feasible for JShop Server to calculate every single permutation of shipping for every shipping zone for a  given cart and so the system sets the maximum amount to double the order total when we send the order    2  Paypal Express does not send a billing address back to the system  it will only provide a shipping address  and so JShop Server will use this as the billing address as well as the shipping address when creating the  order if your checkout has been bypassed completely     17 4 18 3 Paypal Website Payments Pro    Server Requirements     gt   gt   An SSL certificate is required and cURL support with SSL needs to be available in PHP  Please also note that  if  you are using Paypal Website Payments Pro  it is obligatory to also enable and use Paypal Express on your  website  If you do not you will be breaching Paypal s terms and conditions of use  The integration also supports  3D Secure using Paypal s partner  Centinel Commerce  Please refer to Paypal s own documentation and  administration system for details on how to apply for an account
245. re and can  include HTML  Note that line breaks are automatically converted into  lt BR gt  tags when displayed in your store   Reset Date Of This News Item To Now    This option is only available when editing a news item and if checked the news item   s date and time will be re   set to the current date and time when it is saved     In addition  you will also see extra language versions of the available fields if you have multiple languages  setup in your store     142    Customers   143    JShop Server includes a comprehensive customer account and management system  In JShop Server it is  possible for customers to open accounts  setup an address book of delivery addresses  manage and send a  wish list and many other features  In addition the administration system in JShop Server provides the ability to  setup multiple customer account types and to allocate customers to these account types  Rather than just a  way of categorising customers  you can give automatic discounts  give other special discounts  change the  payment options available or even show sections and products only to certain customer types     This section allows you to manage your customers  account types and customer reviews     11 1 General Settings    This screen gives you access to some overall configuration options for customers in JShop Server                 Allow Customer Accounts    Ono    ves  Ono    ves  Ono    ves       Automatically Login On Account Creation       Take Customer to Account on Log
246. re orders are coming from if you have more than one  ordering process     Seller ID From Multipay  Your seller ID as issued by Multipay when you signed up for an account     Order Description  A description of the order that will appear on the Multipay payment page     Country  The country of the merchant    Language  The language you would like the payment page to appear in     213    Payment Gateways   Gateways 214    Payment Types Allowd  Check all those payment types that you would like to accept on your Multipay payment page  The customer will  then have a selection of which to choose from     What Do I Need To Setup At Multipay     You should not need to setup anything at Multipay in order for transactions to be successfully processed     17 4 16 NoChex    Server Requirements  There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with NoChex     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Payment details are taken on NoChex   s payment page     Settings Page Details    Account  Enter the email address of your NoChex account here     Description  This is the description of the order that will appear on the NoChex payment page     Logo    This lets you specify a logo to appear on the NoChex payment page  However  this needs to be from a secure  server otherwise a security notice will be shown to the customer on the NoChex payment page     What Do I Need To Setup At NoChex     Nothing needs to be setup at NoChex     Note  JShop Server will only receive a payment notificatio
247. red  e g  for those customers who do not accept cookies      Cookie Expiry Time   By default the cookie expiry time for cart sessions is set to 3 hours after the last action was performed  e g   the customer visited a page in the store  You can change this expiry time here by entering a new number of  hours  For instance  if you wanted carts to be maintained for a longer period of time  enter a higher number of  hours here     History To Keep When Pruning Carts    JShop Server includes an automated jobs system  one of which is the periodic pruning of old carts in its  database  If you have the automatic job activated for cart pruning  see the Automated Jobs section of this  manual  then this setting sets the number of days you d like to keep when carts are pruned  If you d like to  keep cart history for a while  to use in the reports for instance  then you can change this setting to keep more  history  However  it   s advisable to keep on top of your carts as the information can build up a great deal over  time     Advanced Options    23    General Settings   Cart Sessions  amp  Security Settings 24    Check User Agent  This is recommended as a simple check that a session is owned by the user it was created for  However it is  not perfect as many users have exactly the same user agent string     Check IP Address    Although this will provide greater security on sessions this can cause issues with some ISPs  specifically AOL   where a user s IP address changes frequently durin
248. rganisation within the order management system can be expanded and tailored to your own company   s  needs     15 1 Orders List    The main orders screen constitutes the orders list and is presented full screen width and in descending order  number order  Each line shows you the order number  the date and time that the order was placed  the  customer   s name  order total  printed status  order status and action and process options        Selected Orders Action    Please select v   Create Orde Total selected transactions  413  Viewing 1   10 RESI       4 mont nmn arama ee E     O 200596 O5 Nov 2006  15 20 07  Mr Gareth Lancaster  OS Nov 2006  14 50 22  Mr Gareth Lancaster  04 Nov 2006  16 21 16  Mr Gareth Lancaster          A typical list of orders    In addition on the far left of the list each order line has a checkbox  Multiple orders can be selected and an  action chosen from the top select box  This provides access to view orders  delete orders  print orders   receipts or any additional paperwork templates you have setup  send supplier emails  should you be using this  option  and set the orders as paid or as cancelled     In addition each line has an    Action    button that can be used process individual orders  By default this appears    on the far right  although both this position and when it   s shown  either by mouse over or mouse click  can be  changed on a per user basis via the User Options button located at the top right of the JShop Server menu     192    Ord
249. rs Summary Report                13 4 2 Stock Level Report    The Stock level Report provides listings of products in your store depending on a combination of selection  choices that can be made                Main Stock Level v  Zero Or Negative Stocks Only v  Product Code w       Include     Order Summary Report Selections    Type  Here you can select between a main stock level report of option stock level report     Include    This specifies what products to include  You can include all or only include products that meet a certain stock  status  e g  zero or negative     Order By A    This allows you to alter the sorting of the report to your own desired order     180    Reports   Individual Reports 181    13 4 3 Other Reports    All the other reports utilize the same selection screens and provide the same selection options  The reports are  as follows     Product Popularity Report showing store products in order of the number of times  they have been viewed  Grouped by product code name    Section Popularity Report showing store sections in order of the number of times  they have been viewed  Grouped by section title    Abandoned Carts Products Report showing store products in order of the number of times    they appear in abandoned carts  Grouped by product code   name     Search Statistics Report showing terms searched for in your store and the  number of products and section returned for those terms   Total Orders Report showing the total number of orders    Ordered Pr
250. rts Now    button will remove any old JShop Server carts from the database   Again this information can build up over time so it is advisable to periodically delete old carts after you have  run any reports that use this data     Clear Search Statistics Up To And Including  Clicking on this button will remove search statistics data up until the date specified     13 4 Individual Reports  13 4 1 Order Summary Report    This report provides quick an easy way to obtain order totals from JShop Server  There are a number of  configuration options available        Date From   Date To   Group By    Orders In Currency    Order Status  New v   Totals To Show  Goods Total    Shipping Total  Tax Total   C  Discount Total  C  cert Total  Order Total          Order Summary Report Selections    179    Reports   Individual Reports 180    Date From  This is the start date for the report    Date To  This is the end date for the report    Group by  This is how you want to summarise each entry  You can group by day  month or year     Orders In Currency  Use this box to select which currency you wish to see a report for    Order Status  Use this box to select which order status you want to see a report for     Totals To Show  By checking the different boxes you can opt to show any of the available sub totals for your orders report     Goods Total Shipping Total Tax Total    69 93      950 00     47 00         118 64     735 41    154 77    37 20    2112 95    An Example Of The Output Of The Orde
251. ry Address Not Taxable   O yo     yes    Tax Rounding Round tax before multiplying by quantity   ze    Update Settings       Tax Menu General Settings    Tax Enabled  If you wish to enable tax in your store select YES  otherwise select NO     Add Tax on Shipping    If you wish to add tax onto the shipping charge you setup in JShop Server  presuming that you are using  shipping in your store  select YES for this option  otherwise no tax will be added to the order total for the  shipping charge     Include Delivery Address In Tax Calculation   This setting allows you to check the delivery address for tax  in addition to the billing address  For instance  if  you are in Europe but the purchaser is in the United States and wants it delivered in Europe then tax would be  applicable  This is set as an option as some countries tax does not operate on this policy     Zero Tax If Delivery Address Not Taxable  If you set this option to YES  even if the billing address is taxable  if the delivery address is not taxable  all tax  values will be zero   d     Tax Rounding    94    Tax  Shipping   Tax Menu General Settings 95    JShop Server includes two different tax rounding machanisms  With    Round tax before multiplying by quantity     selected  the tax for a product will be worked out on a quantity of 1 and then multiplied by the cart quantity   usually used in B2C sites   With    Round tax after multiplying by quantity    the tax will be calculated on the full  quantity  usually B2B 
252. s  The fields are as follows     Note  The Visible field is only available on some fields        SELECT  ccType    Credit Card Type    Visa  Mastercard  Switch  Solo  Hummanba       Content    GO       optio   1   validation Ono    yes   Validate For Co  validation Message   ee iss       s   s  d    Language  Spanish             Validation Message       Editing the credit card type field    Name    This is an internal name that is used in the database  It must be unique and you will be told if it is not  This  field is not generally shown to the customer     Title  This is the description of the field that is shown to the customer in the default templates     Size and Maximum Length  only for TEXT type fields     Size is the actual size of the form field on the page and maximum length is the maximum number of  characters a customer can enter into the field     Validation  Validate For and Validation Message   If you want to make it a requirement that a field is filled in you should select YES for the Validation radio  button  In addition  with the Validate For option  you can select how you want the field validated  There are a  number of built in validation types  such as Not Blank or Email Address and  in addition  choosing    Custom  Regex     allows you to enter a Perl style regular expression for the validation  permitting complex validation  routines to be used  If you are not sure how to use regular expressions or wish to find some for your particular  need a good site
253. s Been Recieved   Edit         ContactForm  ContactFormSent Thank You For Contacting Us     GiftCertificates       help Help   NewPasswordSent   News Welcome to the demo  Eq  NewsletterSubscribe Thank You For Subscribing Eg    NewsletterUnsubscribe You Have Unsubscribed     privacy Privacy       SearchResults    send2friend Send Page To A Friend Eq  send2friendSent Send To Friend Eg       StockProblem   terms Terms And Conditions  test test   Welcome    Total Snippets        List of Snippets    The list of snippets gives you an overview of all the snippets you currently have setup in JShop Server along    123    Templates   Snippets 124    with    Edit    and    Delete    buttons for each one  In addition the    Add New Snippet    button at the bottom of the list  allows you to add a new snippet     8 10 1 Adding Editing Snippets    Adding and editing snippets uses the same screen and the options available are as follows        d elcome       A  Ar    aas ela alv o NDE     07    Wf    A   Paragraph   Fort Name   Size   B iu         gt     D  DD  Wd  D  D  D  ul  Mm    Welcome to your JShop Server installation  This is the front page of your new web store  To  get your products to appear below in the Featured Products section simply set them to show  in the main section of your store in the    Contents  section of the administration system        Editing A Snippet    Name   This is the internal name for the snippet and only letters and numbers are allowed  This is the name you
254. s allows you to set the from address that will be sent with the email  If left blank the default address from  Email Options will be used instead     Activated    If set to NO  this email will not be sent  This is useful if you want to turn off some of the emails to stop JShop  Server from sending them     8 3 Template Settings    This screen allows you to set some of the global settings for the template system and also for template editing   You should refer to the Templates Manual for a detailed discussion of options for the templates themselves  such the xTFC and xRTU options             YES    SN YES      YES  We recommend that you use this option for security reasons as it will strip any PHP  directly embedded into your templates  Only turn this option off if you do not need to  use PHP in your templates and never use this option in conjunction with 777 permissions  on the template files on a shared server        Template Settings    Compile Mode   This dictates how JShop Server handles the templates for your store   s front end  The template system can  operate in several different modes  Once developed you would normally run mode 2        Compile if compiled  version doesn   t exist    as this is quicker and less intensive on the server  Whilst developing option 1 would  normally be used        Run templates uncompiled       Word Wrap When Editing  This sets whether you would like the template contents word wrapped on the template editing screen     Allow xTFC Command 
255. s already filled in             61    General Settings   Send to a Friend Fields 62    Name    This is an internal name that is used in the database  It must be unique and you will be told if it is not  This  field is not generally shown to the customer     Title  This is the description of the field that is shown to the customer in the default templates     Size and Maximum Length  only for TEXT type fields     Size is the actual size of the form field on the page and maximum length is the maximum number of  characters a customer can enter into the field     Columns and Rows  only for TEXTAREA type fields     This is the number of columns and rows that the field should be sized to on the contact form page     Validation  Validate For and Validation Message   If you want to make it a requirement that a field is filled in you should select YES for the Validation radio  button  In addition  with the Validate For option  you can select how you want the field validated  There are a  number of built in validation types  such as Not Blank or Email Address and  in addition  choosing    Custom  Regex     allows you to enter a Perl style regular expression for the validation  permitting complex validation  routines to be used  If you are not sure how to use regular expressions or wish to find some for your particular  need a good site is http   regexlib com  where you will find many that you can enter here     Finally the Validation Message is the error message you wish to display if 
256. s covers  in detail  using the templates  themselves to change both your store and emails     The Templates menu consists of four different parts  Firstly there is the    Email Templates Menu    and the  options there cover emails sent out from the system  excluding the newsletters  which are dealt with  separately     see the    Newsletters    section   Secondly there is the    HTML Templates Menu    and this covers  settings for the templates that dictate the look and feel of your store   s front end  Thirdly there is the    Open  Shop    menu and this provides links to opening your store with a number of different template settings  please  see tSys section of the Templates manual available for JShop Server   Finally is the    Template Navigation     section that provides a file list of the templates directory and gives access to on screen editing of the  templates     8 1 Email Options    This screen allows you to set some overall configuration options for emails that are sent out by JShop Server        Email Options    Default Send To Email Address es     This is for emails that are sent from JShop Server to the merchant and here you can provide a comma  separated list of email addresses that you would like these merchant emails sent to  You can enter any number  of email addresses here separated by commas  This can be over ridden by individual email template options     Default From Email Address    All emails that come from the system will use this email address as the
257. s for your store       You can move countries between the two boxes by selecting one in the left box and clicking the round right   arrow button  This will move the country into the    Available Countries    list  Selecting a country in the right box  and clicking the round left arrow button will move a country into the    Unavailable Countries    list     Once you have finished updating your country settings you can click the    Update Country Settings    button to  save the changes     Note  JShop Server contains a full current list of all recognised countries  This country database table also    includes relevant ISO codes that are required by some payment gateways  If countries change in the  future we will issue updates to keep this list accurate and complete        6 3 Reorder Countries    Not only can you select which countries you want to appear in your store but you can also change their display  order  as with many other things within JShop Server   Changing the order of the countries alters the order  they will appear in the country select boxes for billing and delivery addresses     93    Tax  Shipping   Reorder Countries 94    Available Countries    United Kingdom  Anguilla    American Samoa       Update Order    Reordering the country list    6 4 Tax Menu General Settings  On this screen you can specify some overall tax options     Tax Enabled Ono    yes  Add Tax To Shipping Ono    yes  Include Delivery Address In Tax Calculation Ono    yes    Zero Tax If Delive
258. s list settings    Bestsellers    54    General Settings   List Settings 55    Maximum Bestsellers To List     The bestseller list of products is automatically generated by JShop Server based on products ordered from  your shop  This setting allows you to limit how many bestsellers should be made available for the templates     Calculate By    This allows you to set how you would like JShop Server to calculate the bestseller list  You can opt to either  calculate by total quantities sold or the number of times a product has been purchased     Limit Order History Query To   By setting this to a number higher than zero  JShop Server will limit the order history examined to create the  bestseller list to the number of days specified  This is taken from the current date and worked back  so a value  of 14  for instance  would only take into account the last 14 days of orders when calculating     Product Selection Limit          This option allows you to set whether the bestseller list should only choose products specific to the section you  are in  and below  For instance  on the front page  products from the entire store will be chosen  but as you  drill down using the sections  setting this to    Section Specific    will limit which products are included in this list   We only suggest using    Section Specific    if you are caching the bestseller results as the mySQL query required  is more complex for this method     Random Products    Maximum Random Products To List    Again t
259. s needed to integrate with Paypoint     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on Paypoint s payment page     Settings Page Details    Merchant ID    This is the account number issued to you by Paypoint when you signed up for an account with them  For  testing you can use the secpay Merchant ID     Transaction Mode    Paypoint have 3 transaction modes  Use    Test Mode  Success     to test successful transactions  use    Test Mode   Failure     to test failed transactions and use    Live Mode    to use your Paypoint account live     Authorisation Mode    Paypoint have 3 authorisation modes     Full Authorisation    takes the payment straight away     Deferred    secures a  nominal payment on the credit card until fully released by yourself in the Paypoint administration system      Deferred Full    secures the full payment on the credit card until fully released by yourself     Digest Key      This is the digest key that you need to setup at Paypoint  see below   It is required for payment notifications     Remote Password    If you wish to have Paypoint authenticate that the transaction has originated from your store you should set  your remote password in Paypoint s admin system and enter it here  In addition  however  checking this is not  setup by Paypoint by default and  to quote their manual      please ask for this to be done by emailing admin secpay com  quoting your Paypoint account ID and  requesting that the    req_digest true    option
260. s shows the reordering screen that allows you to move the products up and down to  change their display order for this section     Clicking on a product code or product name  or  indeed  the    Edit    button  will show the product editing screen  for that product  In addition there are two other buttons shown for each product  these are as follows     Clone  A powerful feature of JShop Server  the Clone button will launch the product adding screen but with  the selected product s details already loaded  This allows you to quickly and easily create a new product based  on a product that already exists in the database     Remove  This does not delete the product from JShop Server  it simply removes it from the current section   All other sections the product appears in are unaffected by this     Delete  This option will delete the product from the JShop Server database entirely     In addition  if you have the stock control system turned on and the option selected to show stock levels on this  screen  you ll see a column with applicable stock levels shown     At the bottom of the product part of the screen is a search box  This allows you to quickly search for products  to add to this section  The screen that appears will show you a list of all products found  along with a select  button for each one  In addition to this  the checkboxes to the left of each product allow you to select more  than one product from the list and then clicking on the    Select    button at the top a
261. s the default  account in JShop Server     Along with each of the account types is an    Edit    button to edit the account type details and a    Delete    button to  remove the account type     Adding   Editing Account Types    Adding and editing account types uses the same screen  The following fields are available for account types               General Customer Account  All customers are initially placed in this  Ono    yes    Description  Show Prices Including Tax    Discount  o       Allow Seperate Delivery Address  O yo    yes       Editing an existing account type    Name  This is the internal name for the account type     Description  A description  never shown on the front end  to help you remember what the account type is for     144    Customers   Account Types 145    Show Prices Including Tax   The default product price field that is sent to the templates can either include or exclude tax  based on this  setting  For instance for general customers you would probably opt to include tax in the price shown on the  product pages and in the cart  However  if you have wholesale customers  for instance  then it may be  preferable to show the prices excluding tax  In both instances tax will be shown as a separate line at checkout     Discount      This is a very powerful feature that enables you to give an automatic discount off product prices to members of  a customer account type  This discount isn   t shown as an extra line in the cart or at checkout     the prices th
262. s you  say whether you would like the automatic commissions generated from the order processing system to be  unauthorized or authorized by default  Unauthorized payments have to be manually authorized later  If a  customer checks out in a currency that isn t linked to the base currency by an exchange rate the system will  create an Un Authorized payment regardless of this setting     Include Shipping For Commission Calculation  This option decides whether you will include an order   s shipping total in the total used to calculate a  commission  This is only applicable if you are calculating commissions based on percentages     Include Tax For Commission Calculation    This option decides whether you will include an order   s tax total in the total used to calculate a commission   This is only applicable if you are calculating commissions based on percentages     14 2 Affiliate Groups    The affiliate system in JShop Server provides a means to create different groups of affiliates  each of which  has different commission rates  This is useful if you have some affiliates that you wish to enter into special  agreements with or you wish to reward with higher commissions     List Of Affiliate Groups    This screen shows you the currently available affiliate groups you have setup in JShop Server  By default there  is a General affiliate group that all new affiliates will be placed into  This is where you should set you default  commission rates to normal affiliates     Name   Acti
263. se Pricing Combinations facility the One Off Prices facility allows you to change  the one off price for the product depending on what options are chosen or the customer account type viewing  the product     You can switch between the 4 different pricing   combination types by clicking the radio buttons at the top  The  large box will then change to show the type you are currently looking at  Also note that the options available  for each of the types differ     Note  This section is purposefully free from too much validation to give you the freedom to combine  pricing combinations as you need them  However  this can also lead to confusion and care must be taken    that especially with pricing options  conflicts do not arise that cause the product pricing to not be as  expected  It is suggested that you try out different uses of the combinations for yourself to see just  wats possible        79    Contents   Adding  Editing Products 80    5 8 6 Stock Control                   Stock Control Block    These options cover any product level stock control you wish to use  Please also see the    Advanced Pricing    Combinations    section for combination level stock control  The fields here are as follows     Enabled     There are three options here  Select    No    if you don   t wish to track stock on this product  select    Yes    if you wish  to track stock on this product and track the main stock level  even if you have product option stock levels as  well  or select Yes  but t
264. selected  the normal cart page  cart html  for your site will also show currently selected shipping costs  In  addition the customer will be given the option to change the shipping type on the cart screen     6 8 Shipping Zones    The shipping in JShop Server works on zones and this is the first part of the shipping you need to sort out      you enter rates against shipping types according to zones  A zone is defined as a group of countries and or  counties states  For instance if you were running a store from the UK you might setup one zone that simply  contains United Kingdom  another that contains all the European countries  one for America and another for  the rest of the world     96    Taxi Shipping   Shipping Zones 97    With countries  once a country is marked to a zone it cannot be put in another zone unless it is first removed  from the zone it is in or that zone is deleted  This stops you from putting a country in more than one zone  which would give unpredictable results     List Of Shipping Zones    The main shipping zones page lists all the zones you have setup  by their name  Each one has an    Edit    and     Delete    button and in addition there is an    Add New Zone    button at the bottom of the list to create a new zone        Total Zones   Shipping Zones List    Addin Editing Shipping Zones    pm    Countries In Zone Available Countries  Selected Countries   UNited THngy Antarctica  Albania Antigua And Barbuda  Algeria  American Samoa  Andorra  Angola  A
265. specific Meta Tag description field for this section     META Keywords  A specific Meta Tag keywords field for this section     Thumbnail    A thumbnail image for this section  This would normally be shown where the section appears as a sub section   the default templates use this   You have the option of clicking    Browse       to upload an image from your local  PC or clicking the    Pick Image       button to launch the in built image picker  The image picker will show the  sections thumbnail directory contents and you can search for the correct image through that  if it has already  been uploaded  In addition you can enter a name directly into the Pick  field if you know it already exists in the  sections thumbnails directory  The pick field will also accept a URL to an image if you wish to directly link to  images on another site     Image nn  A full sized image for this section  This would normally be shown on the section page itself  You have the  option of clicking    Browse       to upload an image from your local PC or clicking the    Pick Image       button to  launch the in built image picker  The image picker will show the sections normal directory contents and you  can search for the correct image through that  if it has already been uploaded  In addition you can enter a  name directly into the Pick  field if you know it already exists in the sections normal directory  The pick field  will also accept a URL to an image if you wish to directly link to images on 
266. split into pages  depending on the number you have setup  It shows the company name of the supplier along with Edit and  Delete buttons     Total selected suppliers  2  Viewing 1   10       ABC Supplier Listing    In addition to this straight forward listing  a search panel is provided at the bottom of the screen to allow you  to search for suppliers     6 15 Adding  Editing Suppliers    Adding and editing suppliers uses the same screen  Fields available largely depend on what you have setup in  Supplier Fields  and you ll see an entry point for each of those on this screen  In addition  however  there are  some special supplier fields that also require filling in  and these are explained below     Supplier Email Template   Email Address For Orders   Account Number With Supplier  Update Supplier       Editing an existing supplier    Send Supplier Emails For Orders  If you wish to send this supplier order emails then set this to YES     Email Address For Orders  This is the email address for the supplier where the order emails should be sent     106    Taxi Shipping   Adding  Editing Suppliers 107    Account Number With Supplier  This is your account number with the supplier  This can be included on the email template should you need to    include your account number on the order emails     107    Logs   108    Built into Shop Server is a log system that tracks visitors to your store  much like normal server access logs  do  However  there are some important differences     1 
267. ssful logins for  10 __  minutes  Set first value to 0 to disable this feature  It is   advisable to use this option to deter brute force   login attacks to your admin system    accounts can have this status reset on the      List of Users    page       Update Options    The Management Options screen gives you access to global user settings    Non Administrator Safe Mode    With this set to YES all user accounts  apart from the main administrator account  will use the system in    Safe  Mode     This means that although edit delete add etc  buttons will be available no updates to the database will  be saved  effectively making the system    read only        User Action Logging Enabled    Set this to YES if you want user actions saved to a log file for later viewing  Actions included in this include all  add actions  edit actions and delete actions and changes to order status etc  If you are running a busy system  with many changes each and every day you should be aware that the logs created can get quite large  Please  see    Clear Action Log File    for more information     16    User Management   Management Options 17    User Login Logout Logging Enabled    Set this to YES for log records to be created each time somebody tries to login to the administration system   This will log the username used and whether the login failed or was successful  This is separate to the normal  user action logging  even though the records appear in the same log file   as this would normally b
268. t Log Date 04 Jun 2006    Latest Log Date 15 Mar 2007  Total Number OF Days   47  Average Hits Per Day   107          Logs Summary    7 3 Log Reports    The logs system provides a range of different reports and these are detailed below     Browser Type Report showing the spread of browsers on your web site   Grouped by browser type    Operating System Report showing the spread of operating systems on your web  site  Grouped by operating system    Referring URL Report showing sites that people have come from to reach your  store  Grouped by URL    Search Engine Summary Report showing search engines that people have come from to  reach your store  Grouped by search engine    Search Engine   Keywords Report showing search engines and keywords used on those    Combined search engines to reach your store  Grouped by search engine  and keywords     Search Engine Keywords Report showing the keywords used in search engines to reach  your store  Grouped by keywords    Pages Viewed Report showing the popularity of different pages on your site   Grouped by page name  without any query strings    Top Level Domain Report showing the top level domain name of visitors  e g     com   uk etc  Grouped by top level domain    IP Address Reporting showing IP addresses of visitors that have visited your  site  Grouped by IP address    Note  The search engine reports are based on those search engines that JShop Server can recognise  The  list of recognised search engines can be updated by us so if 
269. t Now       or Load From Server    Selecting File To Import    JShop Server provides you with two options of supplying the file to import     Upload From Computer    Clicking the    Browse    button will open a file dialog window and allow you to choose the file you wish to import  from your local machine  Please note that large files may not work correctly using this method due to  configuration settings in PHP limiting the size of uploaded files     Load From Server    Here you can enter a path and file name to an import file located on your server  This is the best option for  larger imports     9 4 1 Update Product Images    This is an import screen and provides the ability to import a list of product IDs and   or product codes along  with corresponding image locations  You should have already uploaded the images to your server and make  sure that the references that you import here are relative to the main JShop Server directory  Without either a  product ID or product code field being included in the import CSV  products will not be updated as there will be  no way of cross referencing import records to the appropriate product     9 4 2 Update Stock Levels    This is an import screen and provides the ability to import a list of product IDs and   or product codes along  with corresponding stock levels  Without either a product ID or product code field being included in the import  CSV  products will not be updated as there will be no way of cross referencing import recor
270. t can be entered for each field is as follows     Name  This is an internal name for the field and should not contain any spaces  This is not shown to the customer in  the default templates     Title    35    General Settings   Extra Article elds 36  This is the public name for the field and the default templates use this when showing the extra field     Exclude From Loo   The default templates use a loop created with the tSys template language that loops through all your extra   article fields on the article page and outputs any content that they may have  However  sometimes you may  want to display one or two extra fields in a different way and by checking this to YES you can remove them   from that default loop in the templates and display them elsewhere on the page where you want to     4 10 2 Image Extra Fields  There are many additional fields available for the IMAGE type of extra field     IMAGE    Exclude From Loop GO vo O ves    Default Image   Upload     Poor      O     C  Remove Image    Image Display Dimensions   x  yi  Leave either x or y blank to only scale by one dimension   Resize Images At Upload   O wo    yes If JPG  use this quality setting   100  best       Language  Spanish    E    Language  Outlandish  Te Cd  Update Field       Editing an IMAGE extra field    Default Image a  This allows you to select a default image that will be shown on an article page if no article specific image has  been uploaded for this field via the article editing screen  You ca
271. tch on the order  Here you can  change the quantities to those actually being dispatched  If there are still product lines left after the dispatch  the order is marked as Part Dispatched and remains open for further dispatches  Any order lines that are not  included at all in the dispatch can have their quantities set to 0     By default when you first view this page  the Dispatch field box for each line will equal the total quantity left on  the order line     197    Orders   Dispatching 198    Dispatching Gift Certificates    Email gift certificates can be dispatched by clicking the    Dispatch    button on the orders list  If you are not using  the dispatch functionality they can be sent to the recipients email address using the routines in Customers     Postal gift certificates require printing and this can be done from the orders detail page  A link to the printable  gift certificate can be found with the other gift certificate information in the order   s basket at the top of the  details page  The postal gift certificate is designed using the template giftcert_print html which is in the normal  templates directory for JShop Server     15 8 Receipt Printing    JShop Server can also print receipts  In the Action column on the orders list page is an orange    Receipt    button   if you have enabled Receipt printing in General   gt  Order Admin Settings   This will open a new window with  the receipt ready for printing  This receipt is designed using the template receipt h
272. te    Turkey TR 792 Y Delete    Turkmenistan     795 Y Edit f Delete    Turks And Caicos Islands Tc 796 Y S   gag  Tuvalu Ty 798 Y Delete    Uganda UG 800 Y Se ga  Ukraine UA 804 Y Delete    United Arab Emirates AE 784 Y Delete    United Kingdom GB 826 Y    Extract of Main Country List Screen    Each one has an    Edit    and    Delete    button and in addition there is an    Add New Country    button at the bottom of  the list to create a new country     Adding   Editing Countries     lt  Back Update Country  The Add Edit Country Screen       Name  This is the visible display name of the country     ISO Code  This is the official ISO Code for the country and should be two upper case characters     ISO Number  This is the official ISO Number for the country     Visible  If set to NO the country will not be visible in your store     92    Taxi Shipping   Country Settings 93    6 2 Country Settings    The screen allows you to choose which countries that will be available in your store  This setting is split into  two large selection boxes  the left one is a list of countries that are currently excluded from your store and  won t appear  the right one is a list of countries that are included in your store and will appear     Countries  Unavailable Countries  Available Countries     United Arab Emirates  United Kingdom  United States   Antarctica United States Minor Outlyir    Antigua And Barbuda UNited THngy  Argentina     lt   Back   Update Country Settings    Choosing countrie
273. te  BUttons buttons RADIOBUTTONS  options options SELECT  imagetest2 imagetest2 IMAGE  LoeweOptions LoeweOptions SELECT  test test CHECKBOXES  Total Extra Fields        Sort   Reorder Extra Fields    List of extra product fields    What Extra Field Types Are Available     There is a selection of different extra field type available and they are as follows     30    General Settings   Extra Product Fields 31    TEXTAREA  IMAGE  SELECT    CHECKBOXES Shown as checkboxes  Each option is shown as a new text box so can be  used to select multiple options for the same extra field  e g  extra pizza  toppings     RADIOBUTTONS Shown as radio buttons   only one option selectable     USERINPUT Shown as a text entry box for the product allowing customers to enter  personalisation information for the product        Of all the fields CHECKBOXES probably needs more of an explanation  Unlike the other select option fields   SELECT and RADIOBUTTONS   CHECKBOXES allows multiple options for the same field to be selected  This is  very powerful if you have a number of optional extras for products as they can all be encapsulated in a single  field        Note  Once an extra field has been setup you cannot change its type        4 8 1 Adding Editing Extra Fields    Adding and editing extra fields both use the same screen  However  when adding an extra field you need to  make sure that you select the correct type as this cannot be changed later on  You choose the type of an extra  field by using the
274. te Fields  Name Title  Type action        fromname From TEXT  toname To TEXT  message Message TEXTAREA  cert  alue Amount TEXT  certCurrency Currency SELECT  certEmail Email Address TEXT  sendPostal Please tick here if you would prefer to send the certificate via  post  CHECKBOX    Total Fields  2    Sort   Reorder Fields       List of Gift Certificate Fields  This allows you to edit the display of the gift certificate fields that are presented to the customer on the gift    certificate purchasing page  You can change the display order of the fields by clicking the    Sort Reorder Fields     button     You cannot add extra fields to this list and you cannot delete any of the existing gift certificate fields either     Editing Gift Certificate Fields  The editable fields are as follows     Name   This is an internal name that is used in the database  It must be unique and you will be told if it is not  This  field is not generally shown to the customer    Title   This is the description of the field that is shown to the customer in the default templates              Ono    ves    NotBlank wf       Columns    Validation  Validate For  Validation Message            Language  Spanish  Title       Waidaton Message      2 Back   Update Field    Editing a Gift Certificate field       Size and Maximum Length  only for TEXT type fields     164    Checkout   Gift Certificate Fields 165    Size is the actual size of the form field on the page and maximum length is the maximum number of 
275. tem     templates shop css     Leave blank for no C55     Editor Configuration File    default ze    Update Settings       WYSIWYG Settings    Enable WYSIWYG Editor    Using the WYSIWYG editor is optional and it can be turned off using this option  If it is turned off  areas that  would use the WYSIWYG editor will  instead  use large text box areas for editing     CSS Stylesheet Location  If you wish to provide access to certain CSS styles then here you can enter the URL to the CSS file you d like to  use     Editor Configuration File   Here you can change the configuration file used for the editor  These are located in the admin resources   wysiwygconfigs directory and  if you   re comfortable with creating new ones for the editor we use  these can be  placed in this directory to be chosen from this drop down     Note  We cannot provide support for creating your own configuration files     4 6 Currency Settings    This is where you setup the currencies that your shop will use  By default only one currency is setup on  installation  This is GBP  but can be changed to whatever base currency you want to use  This base currency   however  cannot be deleted and if you create additional currencies that use exchange rates  they will be  calculated from this base currency     Code   Name Use ania Rate   Gi    GBP British Pounds       USD United States Dollars Y ESE  EUR Euro    Eq  CAN Canadaian Dollars Y    Eg Delete  4    Total Currencies        List of currencies    26    General
276. tered text to the start of the field selected in the     Search On and Sort By  option  If set to NO  it will search for the text anywhere in the field s  selected in     Search On and Sort By     Result Limit  This option allows you to limit the total number of results returned     4 28 Basket Settings    This provides some basic options for the basket   cart used in your store     Basket Sort Order Quantity v    Show Basket After Add    no O ves  Associated Products       Show Associated Products Ono    ves    Maximum Associated Products To Show  Select And Sort By Random   selects sort order randomly ze    Update Settings       Basket Settings  General    Basket Sort Order    Allows you to specify the order in which items in the basket are displayed on the basket page  Available options  are     Product Name   sort by the product name    Product Code   sort by the product code    Price  High to Low    sort by the highest price to the lowest price    Price  Low to High      sort by the lowest price to the highest price    Quantity     sort by quantity  with the highest quantity first    Added Order  First to Last    sort by the order the products were added  with the one added first shown  at the top    Added Order  Last to First    sort by the order the products were added  with the one added last shown  at the top     Show Basket After Add     With this option set to YES the customer will be automatically taken to the main basket   cart page after they  add a new product 
277. terrsersrusrusEusEusErsEesEESEEEREEEEEREEREEREEREEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEREEEEEEEEEn 36  Contact Form Fields        ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeesaeeaeeenaeeaeeesaeeaenesneeaeonaneesnanas 37   4 11 1 Adding Editing Contact Form Fields    sssssssssssusununnunnnnnnununnnnnnannnnunannnnununnnnanannnnnnannnnannnnnnanannnnanann 37       1997 2010 Whorl Ltd  Reproduction prohibited without permission     4 12  4 13  4 14  4 15  4 16  4 17  4 18    4 19    4 20  4 21    4 22  4 23  4 24  4 25  4 26  4 27  4 28  4 29  4 30  4 31  4 32    Part 5  5 1  5 2    5 3  5 4  5 5  5 6  5 7  5 8    Captcha Settings      cccccccssseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeeenesneeseneneeeaenesaeeaeneaneeaeeesaeeaeneaaeeennenneeseanas 38  Search   Listing Settings        sssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nn 40  Product Eqiting  icies e aariaa EL NEEN KEE KREE KOA ANa 41  Meta Tag Details          s cccsssseeeeseeeeeeeenneeeeeeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeseaeaaseeeaeaaseeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeanaaeeeeas 42  Stock Control SettingS uk eEEERRRREEEERRKREEEERKEREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERRERKEEEEN 42  Order Admin Settings      1 ccccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeeeneneeeseeesaeeaenesaeesenesaeesenenneeananns 43  Order Status SettingS uk EEEERRRREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERREREEEERRERKREEEN 44   4 18 1 Adding Editing Order Statuses      sssssssssnssnunnnnununnnnunannnnun
278. text that will be shown to the customer to describe the discount     SEO URL Title  If specified  links to the discount listing page for this discount will use this text instead of the title string     Description    169    Checkout   Automatic Discounts 170    By default this is shown on the discount listing page  which lists all the products and sections that a discount  applies to     Image n M  By default this is shown on the discount listing page  which lists all the products and sections that a discount  applies to     Template For Discount Page   You can setup different templates for different discounts should you wish to  giving you the ability to display  different discount listing pages in different ways to suit  By default a single discount listing template is included  in JShop Server     Offer Type nnm  There are several discount options available here     Goods Total   This type will apply the discount to the entire goods total of the cart  It can still be limited so  that it only comes into effect if the  Requires Products  section is met    Shipping Total   This type will apply the discount to the entire shipping total of the cart  It can still be  limited so that it only comes into effect if the  Requires Products  section is met    Qualifying Products  Cheapest Free   This will apply an 100  discount to the cheapest qualifying  product from the  Requires Products  section that is in the cart    Qualifying Products  Most Expensive Free   This will apply an 10
279. the    Create Order    button on the main  orders listing screen  you can select the currency to create the order in using the drop down beside the     Create Order    button      15 6 Processing Orders    The Action column on the order list page provides processing options for a single order  It provides access to  order status changes  order printing and paperwork printing  including any extra order paperwork you have  setup templates for     In addition to this the Printed column in the orders list provides you with visual confirmation that orders have  been printed  often a pre requisite before progressing an order through your dispatch process     15 7 Dispatching    There are a number of different ways that dispatching can work  depending on the settings you have chosen in  General   gt  Order Admin Settings  We shall take each option in turn here     Note  If you are using the Digital Products feature of JShop Server you should make sure that you have    dispatching enabled for it to work correctly        196    Orders   Dispatching 197                 Products Left To Dispatch    Product Code Product Details Oty Left Dispatch  JUNGAN3 Staring Gorilla 1    Tracking Information    Ono    yes        Enable Tracking       Tracking Reference       Tracking Misc        Courier        Dispatch Order    Dispatch screen showing both dispatch tracking and partial dispatch functionality          Dispatch Functionality Activated    If the dispatch functionality has been activated
280. the Multicards payment page     Authorisation Mode  Multicards have 2 authorisation modes     Normal    takes the payment straight away and    Deferred    secures    212    Payment Gateways   Gateways 213  payment on the customer s credit card until it is released by you in Multicard   s administration system     Silent Post Password    This should be the same as the silent post password you setup in Mulitcards  If it is not  JShop Server will not  receive updates on payment status     Page IDs  Each currency you transact in with Multicards has its own payment page with a unique reference  Enter the  appropriate references here for each of the currencies in your store     What Do I Need To Setup At Multicards     For each of your payment pages at Multicards you need to ensure that the following options are set     Post URL    Set this on each of your Multicards payment pages to the Post URL shown on JShop Server   s Multicards  settings page     Silent Post  Make sure this is set to YES    Post Fields  Set this to  user1 user2    Silent Post Password  Set this to the same password you entered in JShop Server   s Multicards settings page     17 4 15 Multipay    Server Requirements  There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with Multipay     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on the Multipay payment page on their site     Settings Page Details  Administrator ID  free field     You can use this as a reference so that you know whe
281. the option of clicking    Browse       to upload an image from your  local PC or clicking the    Pick Image       button to launch the in built image picker  The image picker will show the  products thumbnail directory contents and you can search for the correct image through that  if it has already  been uploaded  In addition you can enter a name directly into the Pick  field if you know it already exists in the  products thumbnails directory  The pick field will also accept a URL to an image if you wish to directly link to  images on another site     Image  A full sized image for this product  This would normally be shown on the product page itself  the default  templates do this   You have the option of clicking    Browse       to upload an image from your local PC or clicking  the    Pick Image       button to launch the in built image picker  The image picker will show the products normal  directory contents and you can search for the correct image through that if it has already been uploaded  In  addition you can enter a name directly into the Pick  field if you know it already exists in the products normal  directory  The pick field will also accept a URL to an image if you wish to directly link to images on another site     Price  Provides entry boxes for the price in all the currencies that exist in your store  For those currencies that are    calculated by exchange rate  the entry box will be greyed out and will automatically update once the new base  currency price
282. the order  Under normal circumstances the  merchant calculations will provide exact shipping costs as the customer checks out through Google  Checkout    2  Discounts and discount codes redeemed on your site  via  the cart page  or automatically calculated   discounts  have to be sent to Google Checkout as negative cart items  There can be tax issues caused by   this as Google Checkout calculates the tax themselves  although JShop Server will attempt to account for    210    Payment Gateways   Gateways 211    this  When an order notification comes back from Google Checkout to your store  JShop Server splits out this  line again to use for its own discount totals    3  Gift certificates cannot be redeemed through Google Checkout  nor can they be purchased from your store  using Google Checkout as payment    4  If you use one off prices in your store against products you should not use Google Checkout as it has no  support for this   5  Calculations done on Google Checkout may lead to different rounding or totals than if the JShop Server  checkout was used    6  Editing orders in JShop Server that have been placed with Google Checkout is not recommended as this will  have no impact on the order in Google Checkout  In addition Google Checkout does not send across per item  tax totals when a customer completes the ordering process at Google Checkout and this may cause  problems with order editing     17 4 12 InternetSecure    Server Requirements  There are no extra server require
283. the purposes of tax and   or shipping  If you set this as YES  you can set options for these select boxes by  editing the county field in    Customer Fields    or the deliveryCounty field in    Delivery Address Fields        Note  The select options in county and deliveryCounty fields will be linked to avoid inconsistency between    the two        143    Customers   General Settings 144    New Accounts Default Account Type  This allows you to set the account type given to all newly opened accounts     Minimum Password Length  This allows you to set the minimum number of characters a customer may use for their password     11 2 Account Types    This is where you can create account types for your customers  When a customer field signs up from your  store they are automatically entered into the    General    customer account type  You can then choose to move  them into another customer account type as the need arises     List Of Account Types    This screen shows you the currently available account types you have setup in JShop Server     Name  Description Discount a Action e       General General Customer Account  Al customers are initially placed in this type  0   High   Yolume Those customers that order from us often  Gives special discounts  0  mn  Wholesale   Put all wholesale customers into this account type 0  Eg    Total Number of Account Types        The List Of Account Types    The General account type  although it can have its name changed  cannot be deleted as this i
284. the recommendations based on orders that have also included the currently shown product  It then  arranges these by the most occurrences of a product being sold in conjunction with the currently shown  project  This allows you to limit the number of products sent to the templates     55    General Settings   List Settings 56    Maximum Reviews To List on Product Page  Normally you would only want to show the first few reviews on the actual product page  The default templates  provide a link to a separate product review page where all the reviews are shown     4 26 Section Settings    This is where you can setup general options for how information about sections and information on section  pages is displayed     Number Products Per Section Page    Include Sub Sections on Pages After Page One  O yo    w  s  Retrieve Sub Sections for Root Section Ono    ves    If YES  how many levels down    NOTE  Each level radically increases the number of  queries required  We suggest caching rootsections   Default templates only show up to 2 levels maximum    Update Settings       Section Settings    Number Products per Section Page  This gives the total number of products that are shown on a section before Previous and Next style paging is  used     Include Sub Sections on Pages After Page One    If there is more than one page to a section  because of the number of products  and this option is set to NO  will only show products on subsequent pages and not any sub sections     Retrieve Sub S
285. the validation or the field fails and  requires the user to re input information     NOTE  The regular expression validation uses Perl style regular expressions  This has changed in version       2 3 0 from POSIX due to the depreciation of the ereg group of functions in PHP    Visible  Setting this to NO will make a field invisible on the contact form     Content  only available for SELECT type fields     This allows you to enter a list of options for a select box field  You can enter a new option by typing it in the  Option  box and either pressing return or clicking the    Add    button     If you select an already entered option its contents will appear in the Option  box allowing you to change it   You can then click    Apply    to save that change     In addition the three little buttons on the right of the content box allow you to move options up and down the  list  changing their display order  or  by clicking the red X  to delete an option completely     62    Contents   63    The Contents section of the JShop Server administration system is where you setup the sections and products  for your store  It is probably the part of the administration system where you will spend most time as it  represents the core of your store     The menu in this section is split into 3 parts  Sections  Products and Articles    JShop Server supports unlimited sections and section depth  e g  you can categorise your store to an infinite  level of sections and sub sections  Each section can
286. the whole date  range  The graphs are designed to give you an overall feel for popularity of certain records  e g  browser   rather than for detailed analysis     The graphs  along with the textual reports  are suitable for printing and the top of the logs reports page  contains a    Print Logs    button on the right  which will bring up a print dialog     An example of one of the graphs is below     Graph Key   1 com   2 uk   3 net    Top 10 Domains    4 Unknown    Domains       Log Graph  This one shows popularity of top level domains    110    Logs   Clear Logs 111    7 4 Clear Logs    Clear Log Records Up To      nd Including       Clear Logs Now  Clear Logs  This screen gives you the ability to delete log information in the database  Log data can grow large so it   s  advisable to periodically delete the log information from the database using this option  For large sites with a    large number of visitors a day  weekly or  if you have sufficient room on your server  monthly  is advisable   Each page viewed in the store adds one record to the logs database     Alternatively you should consider using an automated job  General   gt  Automated Jobs  to keep the log data in  check     111    Templates   112    This section deals with the options that are available on the Templates menu in the JShop Server  administration system  For a more detailed discussion of the templates and how they work  you should consult  the separate Templates manual available for JShop Server  Thi
287. third party software required     This section of the documentation discusses the Affiliates section of the administration system and the various  features of the Affiliate system     Note  All commission payments are created in the base currency for your store and all payment    information in the affiliate system will be shown in this currency        14 1 General Options    This screen allows you to set your global Affiliate options  The changes you make here will affect how your  affiliate system will operate  how commissions are created and how you will handle the sign up of new  affiliates        Activate Affiliate System    Ono    ves      wo O ves   Ono    ves   H   Je   days  0   first time only     Note  IF a customer checks out in a currency that isn t  linked to the base currency by an exchange   rate the system will create an Un Authorized  payment regardless of this setting     Include Shipping For Commission Calculation      yo    yes     no    yes    Affiliate Signup Moderated  Activate 2nd Tier Feature  Minimum Payment Amount  Life Span OF Affiliate Cookie    Status OF Created Commission       Include Tax For Commission Calculation         Update Settings    Affiliate Settings    Activate Affiliate System  If you wish to use the in built affiliate system for JShop Server you should set this option to YES  otherwise set  this to NO     Affiliate Signup Moderated   If you wish to vet each affiliate before allowing them to actually use the system then you can mod
288. thorisation modes     Full Authorisation    takes the payment straight away and    Pre   Authorisation    secures payment on the customer   s credit card until it is released by you in Worldpay s  administration system     Contact Mode    This option allows you to specify whether the customer is able to change their contact details whilst on  Worldpay   s payment pages  You can either let them change their details  fix them  but show them to the  customer  or hide them completely     Callback Password    This is the callback password that you also need to enter into Worldpay   s administration system  please see  below      What Do I Need To Setup At Worldpay   In your Worldpay administration system you should go Configuration Options and set the following     Callback URL    Set this to the gateways response worldpay php URL on your server  e g   http   www yourdomain com jss gateways response worldpay php   this will be different on your server and depends on where you installed JShop Server to     Callback Enabled   Make sure that this is checked    Callback Password  Enter the same callback password as you entered into JShop Server s Worldpay Settings page     Use Callback Response  If this is checked the order success page from JShop Server will be shown as the confirmation page rather  than Worldpay   s own confirmation page     17 4 23 Realex  17 4 23 1   Realex Redirect    Server Requirements  There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with this gatewa
289. tings   Digital Products Settings 47    This specifies the directory on your server where the digital download files are to be stored  Please see the  installation instructions in Section 2 of this documentation for more information on the digital files directory     Activate Instant Dispatch   For digital products that do not require a registration name and or code this option  when set to YES  will allow  the instant dispatch of digital products as soon as the order is set to paid  If you use this option you should  ensure that you have the Partial Dispatch option also set to YES to account for mixed digital non digital or  digital with without registration information orders     NOTE  In order for the digital product functionality to work correctly you will also have to activate the       dispatch features of JShop Server     4 21 Automated Jobs    JShop Server includes an automated jobs system that provides a facility to run certain activities on a timed  basis in a similar way to    cron    on Unix systems  However  unlike cron  the automated jobs system is handled  by JShop Server  specifically from the front end so jobs may not always run at exactly the time specified  If a  job should have been run at a specific time  the next time a page is visited on the store the job will then be  run  So  for very time sensitive applications it   s not suitable  but a range of jobs are included as standard and  the facility exists to call custom PHP scripts if you wish to run othe
290. tion ID From Product Links    By default JShop Server will include the section ID in any product URL accessed from within a section   However  if you   re concerned about search engines penalising you for duplicate content you can select this  option to stop this being added  If turned off and products are in multiple sections the breadcrumb trail is not  guaranteed to show the correct path to the section the customer was in  the system will show the first path it  locates in its database     Remove  php From Links    If you server supports it  you can select this option to have the  php removed from many links in JShop Server   If selected  a product URL will look something like http   www domain com product xProd 25    Use Safe URLs Where Applicable _ _  gt   This option is for those using Apache web servers who have mod_rewrite setup to support URLs in the style  http   www domain com product php 20 3 rather than the normal style which would be  http   www domain   com product  php xProd 20 amp xSec 3  You can check whether your system supports this easily by going to a  page and adding  hello to the end of it  For instance  the following  http   www domain com index php hello      if the page shows correctly then your site supports mod_rewrite  Although many search engines  including  Google  will index pages with the normal style of URL  some will not and  if your server supports it  you should  turn this option on  Please speak to us or your hosting company if you need 
291. tml which is in the normal  templates directory for JShop Server     198    Backup   199    JShop Server includes a full backup and restore system to help you store and  if necessary  retrieve the data  for your store  It is always advisable to keep backups of your data and not only can this be done through JShop  Server but there are also other methods that can be used to ensure your data is safe  please see later in this  section      The initial installation SQL for JShop Server was created using the Backup Database functions of the software     16 1 Backup Database    This screen allows you to backup your database  This does a complete backup of all the data in the database   Note  Images  templates and the PHP files for JShop Server are not stored in the database and so should be  backed up separately                Output Method  Select Output Method    Server File Name   Save To Server only         Download File In Browser v  Z  Development web  JSS  system admin     Backup Now          Backup Screen    Note  If your database is large the backup file might take many minutes to create and also take some    time to download        Saving The Backup File    JShop Server provides you with three different options when backing up     Download File In Browser    This will cause a file download box to pop up and allow you to save the file to your local computer  Please note  that some browsers do not support this method and you will not be able to use this to backup data     O
292. to remove this payment option completely from being selected in your store   s checkout  process     Account Types  This selects what customer account types can actually see this payment option  this gives you the ability to only    show specific customers of a certain account type some payment options  Selecting    All    will make the payment  option available to all customers     Customer Email Confirmation    This allows you to set when the customer will receive their email confirmation  This is important especially  where payment gateways are concerned as some of them require that JShop Server transfers the customer to  the payment gateway for them to make their final payment for the order  JShop Server will first save the  order  then forward them onto the payment gateway  Once the customer has made payment at the payment  gateway  JShop Server will normally receive a notification on payment status    The options available here are     e No customer confirmation email  If the customer pays using this payment option they will not be sent a  confirmation email    e When order is placed  As soon as the order is created by JShop Server the customer confirmation email  will be sent    e When order is marked as paid  As soon as the order is marked as paid  either manually through the  Order Management section or automatically by a notification from a payment gateway  the customer  confirmation email will be sent     160    Checkout   Payment Options 161    Set Order Status   
293. to your Barclays ePDQ CPI setup     Merchant Display Name  The company name you wish to display on the Barclays ePDQ payment page     Payment Page Text Colour  The colour of the text you wish to use on the payment page  in normal HTML colour syntax e g   000000    Black   FFFFFF   White    Payment Page Background Colour  The colour of the background you wish to use on the payment page  in normal HTML colour syntax e g    000000   Black   FFFFFF   White    Payment Page Logo  The full URL to any logo you would like to show on the Barclays ePDQ payment page  Note  This should only be  used if you have a secure server and can reference the image with https       Supported Card Types  Here you can select the card types that you support through Barclays ePDQ  This will limit the selections  available to the customer on the payment page     Use https  if available  for Transfer to Baricays    If you are using an SSL certificate with your JShop Server store you should select YES for this option as it will  avoid transferring the customer to an http    connection to send them to Barclays     Show Delivery Information  If you do not wish to show the delivery address information on the Barclays ePDQ checkout screens  select YES  here     What Do I Need To Setup At Barclays     On the details page for Barclays ePDQ in JShop Server you will be given details that you need to enter into your  ePDQ CPI administration  In addition you should ensure that the Passphrase you enter into JShop Ser
294. tomatically send out the gift certificate email  Note  This also happens automatically when an email gift  certificate order is marked as dispatched in the Order Management system     For postal certificates a button called    Show    will be displayed which  when clicked  will open up a new window    with the printable gift certificate  This printable gift certificate is generated using the template giftcert_print   html which can be found in the normal templates directory     167    Checkout   Automatic Discounts 168    12 9 Automatic Discounts    In addition to the standard discounts available per customer types  the Automatic Discounts section allows you  to setup additional discounts based upon a number of criteria  including products in the cart  These discounts  can take several forms  including goods total and shipping total discounts or cheapest product free etc  For  instance  setting up an Automatic Discount that gives a 100  discount off the shipping cost when the goods in  the cart total more than 100 GBP would equate to free shipping  Automatic discounts can also be shown on  your front end store against products and sections that have products that qualify and full automatic lists   presented in a similar way to the search or section listing pages     Automatic Discounts are shown as a separate line in the cart and at checkout  giving the total amount of all the  discounts that are applicable to the order     List Of Automatic Discounts    The list of Special D
295. tore  This page has extensive in line help to aid in making decisions on what  settings to use     The    Advanced Options    title  when clicked  will display more advanced settings for cart session security  The    default security options provide a basic level of security that is applicable to all installations but this can be  further tailored using the advanced options     22    General Settings   Cart Sessions  amp  Security Settings 23    These options allow you to customise the way the session security works in JShop Server to suit  your hosting environment and what ISPs your customers generally use  It is advisable to only  change these options whilst developing your store or whilst your shop is unavailable as changing  these options may cause problems with existing cart sessions     NO Wes   Create copy of cart without customer information w  Create New Cart ID on Login 0     no    ves  Create New Cart ID on Checkout      yo    yes  Customer Account Login Timeout   Elo   minutes  0   disable this feature   Log Cart Creation  amp  Checks Daun    ves    Filename    Indude full path  e g   www domain file  txt  or path relative to  main JShop Server directory        Cart Sessions  amp  Security Settings    Basic Options    Cookie Name    This will not be applicable to most but for advanced users this gives you control over the cart identifier cookie  name that JShop Server uses  In addition to using cookies  JShop Server also uses a session identifier on URLs  if requi
296. tration system     Integration With Other Exchange Services    JShop Server s integration with currency exchange services is modular which enables us to add new services  to the supported list with the minimum of effort  If you wish to use a service that is not currently supported by  JShop Server please contact us     We cannot guarantee we will be able to support all currency exchange services  mostly because some rely  upon special software being installed on your server  that your server may not be capable of having  or require  particular operating systems on your server     However  the majority will not be a problem to install so please feel free to contact us  There may be a charge  for integrating your chosen currency exchange service     18 1 RBS Worldpay    Server Requirements    There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with the Worldpay currency exchange service  although you will need to be a Worldpay merchant in order to use it     Settings Page Details    Worldpay Installation ID  This is your installation ID as setup by Worldpay     Worldpay Info Password  This is the information password you have setup at Worldpay     What Do I Need To Setup At Worldpay     You need to ensure that you have setup an Info Password at Worldpay for the Installation ID you will be using  to access the exchange rate service  otherwise exchange rate information will not be received by JShop  Server     230    
297. tup in your store     4 13 Search  Listing Settings    These options allow you to change the number of records that are shown on various pages in the  administration system before pages are used with Previous and Next buttons  They are as follows     Number Products Per Page  Number Sections Per Page  Number Orders Per Page    Number Customers Per Page  Number Customer Reviews Per Page    Update Settings       Search   Listing Settings    Number Products per Page  This sets how many products should be shown on the product list page  e g  when searching for products in  the Content section of the administration system     Number Sections per Page    This sets how many sections should be shown on the section list page  e g  when searching for sections in the  Content section of the administration system     Number Orders per Page  This sets how many orders should be shown on the orders list page     Number Customers per Page    This sets how many customers should be shown on the customer list page  e g  when searching for customers  in the Customers section of the administration system     Number Customer Reviews per Page    This sets how many customer reviews should be shown on the customer review list page  e g  when searching  for customer reviews in the Customers section of the administration system     40    General Settings   Product Editing 41    4 14 Product Editing    As the product information screens in the administration system contain a large amount of information 
298. ty State  Country  Postcode Zip  Email  Telephone    Fax    TEXT    TEXT    mer 3 GEES  mer EM  Txt BE  TexT 3 GEES  mer EA EEE  TexT EA GEES  Text E  mer EM  mer EH              12       Sort   Reorder Fields    List of Affiliate Fields    186    The list of affiliate fields gives you an overall view of the fields for customers  their internal and viewable titles    along with an    Edit    button and    Delete    button  if applicable      At the bottom of this screen there is also an    Add New Field    button along with a select box for the type of field    you would like to add     186    Affiliates   Affiliate Fields 187    14 4 1 Adding Editing Affiliate Fields    Adding and editing affiliate fields uses the same screen  However  some of the options are only available for  certain types of fields  Options available are as follows              TEXT  aff_Company    Company   Ono    ves    NotBlank wf  Please enter you company name   Ono    ves       Maximum Length  Validation    Validate For          Validation Message  Visible  Language  Spanish  Title           Validation Message       Editing an Affiliate Field    Name    This is an internal name that is used in the database  It must be unique and you will be told if it is not  This  field is not generally shown to the customer     Title  This is the description of the field that is shown to the customer in the default templates     Size and Maximum Length  only for TEXT type fields     Size is the actual size of the 
299. ume    Total Payment Options  6  Sort   Reorder Options        Payment Options list    PayPal  NoChex and Credit Card  if you have selected a payment gateway for credit cards on the Edit screen   will also have green    Settings    buttons available  For more information on what the screens clicking on these  buttons bring up please see the    Payment Gateways    section of this documentation     Note  Credit Card  PayPal and NoChex options cannot be deleted from the store completely but if you do    not wish to use any of them you can set the Enabled flag to NO on the edit screen and they will not then  appear as a payment option to the customer        159    Checkout   Payment Options 160    12 3 1 Adding Editing Payment Options    Adding and editing payment options uses the same screen  The fields available are as follows  Some of these  are only available for certain payment option types         Credit   Debit Card           Account Types    High Volume       Route Through Gateway Barclays ePDO s  Customer Email Confirmation    when order is placed v    Set Order Status    For payment gateways and online payment providers  e g  Paypal  order will be    created as NEW then set to the above if payment is successful or set to FAILED  if payment is declined    Language  Spanish    Name O  Language  Outlandish          Editing a Payment Option    Name  This is the name of the payment option  This will be shown to the customer in your store     Enabled    Select NO if you want 
300. unnnnununnnnunannnnununnnnanannnnanannnnannnnnnanannnnanan n 45  Extra Order Paperwork      s cscecessseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeaeaneeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaseeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeas 45   4 19 1 Adding Editing Paperwork Templates     ssssssssunsnsununnnnununnnnununnnnanannnnnnunnnnanannnnanannnnnnunnnnanannnnannnn 46  Digital Products Settings       cccccsssseeessseeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeanaaeeeeas 46  Automated Jobs      cccceteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee nee 47   4 21 1 Adding Editing Automated Jobs     esuersrssEssEeREEREEREEREESEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEn 48  Image Settings      cccsssceeesseseeeeseeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaseeeeeaaseeeoeaaeeeeoeaeeeeaeaaeeeeoesaeeeennnseesenoas 50  Cache SettingS      cccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneseeeeeeeseeeaeeesaeeaeeesaeeaeeesaeesenenaeeaenesaeeaeneaaeeenaeaneeanonns 52  XML SiteMap serorea enaere EE AEE oE Aar A Aea EEEE KEA nese 53  List Settings sssssiisas reris konnavusdanneiins anA R KEE KREE KREE EEER KREE KREE KE KEE KREE KENNA E RENEE KNNER KEA 54  Section Settings        cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneneeeaeneneeeaenesaeeaenesaeeseeesaeeseneaaeeaeneaneeenaens 56  Search Settings sridi aE EEA E 56  Basket SettingS ssserrsurinurednunsunaan innuna nnn anana a uranu aa A UNENEE ENKA KREE EEERKR KEE KREE EEERER KEE KREE EERKREn 58  Review Settings     ccccssssceeesseseeeeseeeeeeeenaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaseeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaseseaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeseaaeeeeas 59  
301. ununnnnannnnnnanannnnanunnnnanannananannnnannnnananannnnannnnnnanannanannnnananannananan nanan 129  9 4 4 Update Existing Products   sssssssssnsusunnnnunnnnnnunannnnanunnnnanannunanannnnannnnunanannnnanunnnnanannnnanannanannnnananan nanan 129  9 4 5 New Products    sssssssssssnnnnnannnnununnununannnnununnnnanunnnnanannanannnnnnanannananannnnanannananannnnanunnnnanannananannanannn nanasan nanan 130  9 4 6 Update Qty DISCOUNTS   sssssssussusununnnnununnnnanunnnnanannnnanunnnnanannunanannnnannnnananannnnannnnnnannnnnnannnnanannnnananan nanan 130  9 4 7 Update Base Pricing Combinations     s ssssssssssnunanunnnnunnnnununnnnnnununnununannnnannnnnnannnnnnannnnanannnnnnannnnan an 130  9 4 8 Update Attribute Combinations     s sssssssssusunnnnnnanunnnnunnnnunununnnnunnnnununnnnnnannnnnnannnnnnannnnanannnnananan nanan 131  GEWEIT 131  9 4 10 CUSTOMETS   uurtusersEEREEEREEEREEEREEEREEEREEEREEEREEEREEREEEEEEEREEEREEEREEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEREEEREEEREEEREEEREEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEN 131  GEWNKRT ed TEEN 131  9 4 12 Associated TE 132  Evportimg       sskkeeEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEKRKREEEEERKREEEEERKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEEERKREEEEKEKREEEERRE 132  9 5 1 MEIER Nu CTT 133  Quickbooks Menu    eekkeEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEEKKKREEEERKKREEEEREKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRKREEEERRE 133  9 6 1 Quickbooks Settings   ss ssssssunsusunnnnnnununnunununnnnnnannnnanunnnnunnnnnnanunnnnannnnanunannnnannnnnnannnnnnannnnanannn nananana nanan 134  9 6 2 Quickbooks EXpOrt   s sssssssnsusunnnnun
302. urity reasons     122       The template editing screen allows you to make changes to templates via  your browser  Changes to the  template can be saved by clicking on the    Save    button or the template can be saved under a different name by  entering a name in the text box at the bottom and clicking    Save As     This is useful if you want to use different   templates for different product and section pages  the template that a product or a section uses can be  specified on the product section information screens     please see the    Content    section for more information      lt  inc lude includes top html  gt    lt div id  jJssMainContent  gt    lt  inc lude  includes breadcrumb  html  gt      lt  set path endText  gt  labels affiliates titleAdministration  lt   set A     lt div class  jssPageHeading  gt   labels affiliates titleddmin    Edit Template  z   Development  web  JSS  system  templates  affiliateaccount html    Ul     lt div style  float  left  width    lt p gt      lt  p gt    lt  div gt      lt   ii      Save As    Template Settings              lt div style  margin left  auto  margin right  auto   lt hi gt   labels affiliates accountDetails  lt  h         affiliate aff Company    lt br  gt  affiliate    lt br  gt  affiliate    lt br  gt  affiliate    lt br  gt  affiliate    lt br  gt  affiliate    lt br  gt  affiliate    lt br  gt  affiliate      lt div style  float  right  width     200px  te    aff Conta  aff Addre  aff Addre  aff Town   aff Count  af
303. use to login to their account     Password  Only enter a password here if you want to set change a password for the affiliate  Left blank  any existing    188    Affiliates   Adding  Editing an Affiliate 189  password will be left unchanged     Affiliate Group  This select box allows you to select which affiliate group this affiliate belongs to  Please see the    Affiliate  Groups    heading  discussed previously in this section  for more information on affiliate groups     Status  This lets you set the status of the affiliate   s account  Possible values are     e    New        Generally used when affiliate signups are being moderated  Affiliate will not have access to their  administration system       Live        Normal status for an affiliate account that is operational     On Hold        Status you can use in exceptional circumstances when you wish to halt the affiliate logging into  their administration system or receiving commission payments       Declined        Generally used when the affiliate signups are being moderated and the account has been  declined     14 6 Affiliate Lists  New Affiliate Listing    This shows a list of all affiliates with the account status of    New     This list is mostly used for moderation of  affiliate signups     ABC Affiliate Listing    This shows a list of all affiliates of all status in alphabetical order of company name     Total selected affiliates  3  Viewing 1   10          Maya Ltd  maya maya whorl co uk 12 5ep 2003   General Li
304. utput To Screen  Save With    View Source        This will output the backup to the screen and you can then save it to your local machine by using the View  Source option in your web browser     Save To Server    This lets you save the backup directly to your web server in the location specified by the    Server File Name     field  It is important that you enter a valid path and file name and that the directly you are backing up to has  the correct permissions to allow PHP to create a file  In addition please note that it is advisable to backup to a  password protected directory to disallow people getting access to the files via  the web  For extra security  choose a path that is outside of the web root     199    Backup   Restore Database 200    16 2 Restore Database    If the need ever arises for you to restore a previously made backup  this option allows you to do this     SQL Backup File  Upload From Computer       OR    SQL Backup File  Load From Server  Z  Development web JSS  system admin      Restoring data from an SQL backup will overwrite all existing data   Only use this option if you are sure you need to and  if unsure  make another  backup of the data on the system before proceeding        Restore Data          Restore Screen    Upload From Computer    Clicking the    Browse    button will open a file dialog window and allow you to choose the file you wish to restore  from your local machine  Please note that large files may not work correctly using this method 
305. ve EH  Moopf Development moopf gareth moopf com 12 Sep 2003 General Live ES Delete  Whorl Ltd  whorl gareth whorl co uk 07 Sep 2003 High Profile Live       Total Number of Affiliates        A typical list of affiliates    Date Affiliate Listing    This shows a list of all affiliates of all status in descending date order  with the newest first     14 7 Creating Editing a Transaction    Each commission or payment is created as a transaction in the affiliate system  You can  at any time  create or  edit transactions for affiliates and both these operations are carried our on the same screen  Some of the  information  however  cannot be edited once a transaction has been created     189    Affiliates   Creating  Editing a Transaction 190            Affiliate       Whorl Ltd   whorl  v  Un   uthorized v    Reference  Transaction Type  Amount    Transaction Status       Editing an existing affiliate transaction    The fields shown on this screen are as follows    Affiliate    When adding a new transaction you can choose the affiliate to create this for from the drop down box shown  for this field  Once a transaction has been created you cannot edit the affiliate it is for     Reference    Use this to enter a reference for the transaction that the affiliate will see  When transactions for commissions  are automatically created by JShop Server the reference will be the order number it was for     Transaction Type  This select box allows you to set the type for the transaction  The p
306. ve it to your local machine by using the View  Source option in your web browser     Save To Server    This lets you save the export directly to your web server in the location specified by the    Server File Name     field  It is important that you enter a valid path and file name and that the directly you are exporting to has the  correct permissions to allow PHP to create a file  In addition please note that it is advisable to export to a  password protected directory to disallow people getting access to the files via  the web  For extra security  choose a path that is outside of the web root     Exporting Orders    When exporting orders there is an additional section of the export screen that allows you to choose a data  range for the export along with a selection to only export orders with a certain order status     Order Selection    From Date  To Date   Order Status     Extra Selection Criteria For Order Exports    132    Import Export   Exporting 133  9 5 1 Available Exports  Export Mailing List    Export screen that provides access to all the records on your mailing list  Currently only two fields are  available  RecipientID is an internal JShop Server identifier for the record     Export Orders    Export screen that provides access to all the orders from your store  This screen also provides you with a Date  Range selector allowing you to limit the range of orders that will appear in the exported file     Note  Including any of the order line fields  e g  lineID  pr
307. ve split up the fields into logical  blocks  each of which can be shown or hidden as needed     In General   gt  Product Editing you can set which blocks are hidden by default when adding  editing or cloning a  product  We suggest you use this feature  especially the settings for editing a product as it will help to reduce  the amount of information on screen to only that that is most often changed     At the top of each block on the product information screen is the block title and a blue link  If a block is visible it  will say    hide    and clicking it will roll the block up so just the block   s title is visible  Once a block has been rolled  up  the link will change to    show    and clicking it again will un roll the block again  showing you the fields  contained within it     This section on adding and editing products has also been split into the same blocks you will see on the  product information screen for consistency     Note  As with all other screens in JShop Server no edits will be saved unless you click the bottom Insert    Update button     71    Contents   Adding  Editing Products 72    5 8 1 General Details  These are the most common settings for products and the block contains all the basic product information that  all products need  The fields are as follows     72    Contents   Adding  Editing Products 73              Overrides normal Name for Safe URL page links                                                       This price will be added to the tota
308. ver  matches the Passphrase you enter into the CPI    Finally  you will need to password protect the gateways barclays  directory with a  htaccess username and  password and also enter these details into your ePDQ CPI     205    Payment Gateways   Gateways 206    17 4 5 CardSave  Enter topic text here     17 4 5 1 CardSave Direct    Server Requirements    You will require your own secure server certificate  SSL  and CURL installed for PHP with secure sockets  support     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken     Credit card details are taken on your site  In addition  for 3D Secure transactions  an IFRAME will be shown  within your site for the customer to enter their authentication password     Settings Page Details    Merchant ID  This is the Merchant ID issued to you by the gateway     Password  This is the transaction password issued to you by the gateway     What Do I Need To Setup At Cardsave     There is nothing that you need to setup at CardSave     17 4 5 2 CardSave Hosted  Server Requirements    There are no extra server requirements needed to integrate with CardSave Hosted Payment Page     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on CardSave s payment page     Settings Page Details    Merchant ID  This is the Merchant ID issued to you by the gateway    Pre Shared Key    This is the pre shared key available from CardSave via  the Merchant Information page     Password  This is the transaction password issued to you by the gateway     Order D
309. view     Address Line 1  Address Line 2  County State   Postcode ZIP    United Kingdom  01663 749726  General Email    sales whorl co uk  http    www doublepadiock  com jssdemo       Update Company Details       Company Details screen is where you can enter your company information  The fields should be fairly self explanatory  however  the General Email setting is only used for display on the    templates  The actual email addresses that JShop Server sends various emails to for the merchant are set in  the Email Options and against email templates in the Templates section of the administration system     19    General Settings   Global Options 20    4 2 Global Options    These options cover a few global settings for your store and should be used with caution     Ono    Yes    127 0 0 1     Separate multiple IP addresses with commas     KX    YES  If YES  use following character to rep ace spaces    and non safe characters  L  and  Remove     replacements     Use the option below to adjust for Daylight Savings Time    Ono    yes       Global Options    Shop Availability    Is Shop Available    Setting this to NO will instantly take your shop off line  No matter what page the user tries to load the  unavailable html template will be served to the user  This is useful if you need to make updates to your store  and you do not want it being used until those updates are finished  It should also be used when you are  installing any JShop Server updates     Allow These IP Addresses 
310. xplanation of the possible options is also given  For instance  if you were  a US store you would want to show the month first     Time Format    As per Date Format  this changes how the time is to be shown in both the administration system and on the  front end  Again an explanation of the possible options is also given     Convert Line Breaks To  lt br  gt  on Products and Section Fields    By default this is set to YES meaning that any line breaks you enter in a product or section description will be  automatically converted to  lt br  gt  s when they are displayed on the front end of your shop  It doesn   t actually  alter the data that   s entered in any way  this is simply something that happens before the data is sent to the  template system  If you wish to retain complete control over how your descriptions are shown  turn this option  off  Doing so means you will need to enter your own  lt br  gt s for line breaks to be shown correctly     25    General Settings   General Settings 26    Note  If you have the WYSIWYG editor turned on  this option will have no effect     4 5 WYSIWYG Settings    JShop Server includes a built in WYSIWYG editor  Innovastudio  that provides rich HTML editing in a number of  places  for instance product and section descriptions or snippet editing  This screen contains the settings  available to customise the use of the WYSIWYG editor     Enable WYSIWYG Editor  O yo    yes    CSS Stylesheet Location   http    localhost development web I55 sys
311. y     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on the payment gateway   s payment page     Settings Page Details    Merchant ID  This is your merchant ID with the gateway     221    Payment Gateways   Gateways 222    Secret  This is the shared secret given to you by the payment gateway as part of your setup    Account    This is the settlement account these payments should go to  Please consult the gateway for more information  on the required setting here     Auto Settle Mode    Here you can choose between manual settling  which means that you have to login to your Realex  administration system to fully process a payment or settling in the next batch  which will automatically process  payments     What Do I Need To Setup At Realex     You will need to contact Realex to let them know the response URL for your store  This is listed in JShop  Server on the settings page for the Realex Redirect integration   17 4 23 2  Realex Remote    Server Requirements    You will require your own secure server certificate  SSL  and CURL installed for PHP with secure sockets  support     Where Are Credit Card Details Taken   Credit card details are taken on your site     Settings Page Details    Merchant ID  This is your merchant ID with the gateway     Secret  This is the shared secret given to you by the payment gateway as part of your setup    Account    This is the settlement account these payments should go to  Please consult the gateway for more information  o
312. y deducted   Credit to stock  if already deducted      Create affiliate commission  if not already created      Send supplier emails     Clear credit card details    Update Status    Order Status Detail Screen       Name  This is simply the name you would like to give this order status    Order List Highlight Color   On the main orders screen you can highlight rows with different colors to help highlight orders of different  status  The value entered here is a HTML color  e g   000000 for black and  ffffff for white  You can use the  Pick button to select a colour from the built in colour picker in JShop Server     Processing When Order Given This Status   The checkboxes here allow you to specify what processing JShop Server should do when a status is given to  an order  These options should be self explanatory and obviously  options such as Deduct from Stock will only  be relevant if you are using the stock system     4 19 Extra Order Paperwork    Within JShop Server you can setup multiple templates to use for printing different types of paperwork  in  addition to the built in Receipt printing facility  Once setup  multiple orders can be selected at once in the Order  Administration section of JShop Server and can be printed using any one of the paperwork templates you have  created  For more information about settings up paperwork templates please see the Templates Variables And  Attributes section of this documentation     From the main paperwork list you can add  edit and
313. yment gateway   s administration system     Note  We cannot guarantee that the order status within JShop Server will always update correctly  This  can be down to the customer not completing their purchase  the payment gateway not sending a    notification of payment status back to JShop Server or time out problems when the payment gateway  tries to contact your server        You should always check payments with your administration system from the payment gateway      this is the  only 100  authoritative source of payment information     17 1 Integration with Other Payment Gateways    JShop Server s integration with payment gateways is modular which enables us to add new payment gateways  to the supported list in between upgrades  If you wish to use a payment gateway that is not currently  supported by JShop Server please contact us     We cannot guarantee we will be able to support all payment gateways  mostly because some rely upon special  software being installed on your server  that your server may not be capable of having  or require particular  operating systems on your server     However  the majority will not be a problem to install so please feel free to contact us  Charges for the  integration of a new gateway will depend on the complexity of the required integration and the demand for the  gateway     17 2 The Use of cURL    Some payment gateways require the use of secure server socket connections between the merchant s server  and the payment gateway   s server 
314. you have a request for a new search engine to  be included please do let us know  This update can be issued quickly        Each report is grouped by a certain type of record  for instance the operating system report is grouped by  operating system which means that all occurrences of an operating system are grouped into one record with a  total  The reports then show the results grouped by the total for each of the types of record  in descending    109    Logs   Log Reports 110    order     O Browser Type   d Operating System   CI Referring URL   d Search Engine Summary   d Search Engine   Keywords Combined  d Search Engine Keywords    d Pages viewed    d Top Level Domains  O IP Address       Show Report    Report Selector    By using the Select Range section of the Logs menu you can restrict the date range you want the reports to  cover and in addition select a primary grouping for the reports  to help split the report up even further     For instance  should you select Month as the grouping  the report will show totals for occurrences by month  and not for the total in the database  This becomes more useful when grouping by day of week  for instance   as it allows you to see which day of the week is the most popular for referrals  and from which sites  for  example     In addition to the actual textual report each report has an associated graph with it  Unlike the textual report   the graph doesn   t use the primary grouping  e g  month and just groups by type of record for 
315. yping it in the  Option  box and either pressing return or clicking the    Add    button     If you select an already entered option its contents will appear in the Option  box allowing you to change it   You can then click    Apply    to save that change     In addition the three little buttons on the right of the content box allow you to move items up and down the list   changing their display order  or  by clicking the red X  to delete an item completely     12 3 Payment Options    This is where you can setup the various payment options you wish to give customers when they checkout  In  addition to being able to provide Credit Card  PayPal and NoChex payments  should you want to   you can also  setup an unlimited number of other    offline    payment methods that the customer can choose on the payment  details page when checking out     List Of Payment Options    This screen presents a list of the currently setup payment options  It includes details on whether the payment  option is enabled and which customer types it is available for  Next to each payment option is an    Edit    button  and on all but the Credit Card  PayPal and NoChex options  a    Delete    button will be available in order to  remove the payment option completely     Name Type Enabled   Account Types   Status               Credit   Debit Card BARCLAYSEPDQ Settings Paid   Cheque Y All New E    PayPal PAYPAL all Paid ED   NoChex NOCHEX General Paid Eq  High Yolume   Bank Draft N General Paid Eg  High Yol
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
SmartScore X2 Professional-Edition  Chapter One - File Menu  自動散水制御機器  Samsung Galaxy Grand 2 Kasutusjuhend  Sitemgr user manual  DELL Inspiron 3737  MORA-DNA Food pathogens    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file